Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutTelacu Construction Management; 2006-07-26; PWS06-22ENG Part 2 of 3SECTION 02310 GRADING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of topsoil. B. Rough grading the site for site structures and building pads. C. Finish grading. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02230 - Site Clearing. B. Section 02315 - Excavation. C. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Filling and compaction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with standard specifications for public works construction ('Green Book') 1. Maintain one copy on site. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect above- and below-grade utilities that remain. B. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain as a portion of final landscaping. C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from grading equipment and vehicular traffic. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: See Section 02316. B. Other Fill Materials: See Section 02316. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities. C. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain, from damage. D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GRADING 02310 -1 E. Provide all staking and field engineering required to implement the work as shown on the drawings. F. Protect all stakes and benchmarks. Replace all stakes and benchmarks damaged during the course of construction at no cost to Owner. G. As a minimum, set grade stakes, at 25 foot interval using instrument technology. 3.03 ROUGH GRADING A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded, without mixing with foreign materials. B. Do not remove topsoil when wet. C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded. D. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture content. E. See Section 02316 for filling procedures. F. Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench existing slopes greater than 1:4 to key fill material to slope for firm bearing. G. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill. H. Grade top of slope at perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into or eroding excavation. 3.04 SOIL REMOVAL A. Stockpile topsoil/subsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site. B. Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 8 feet; protect from erosion. 3.05 FINISH GRADING A. Before Finish Grading: 1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted. B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches. D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches. E. Place topsoil in areas indicated. F. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade. G. Place topsoil to thickness indicated. H. Place topsoil during dry weather. I. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. J. Near plants and buildings spread topsoil manually to prevent damage. K. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of subgrade. L. Lightly compact placed topsoil. 3.06 TOLERANCES Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GRADING 02310 -2 A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot from required elevation. B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 02316 for compaction density testing. 3.08 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water. B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping. C. Protect excavations by methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation. D. Provide for dust control under the provisions of Supplemental Provisions Section 7-8 - Project Site Maintenance. E. Maintain all streets and public ways free of dust and mud as directed by local jurisdictional authority, including use of wash down and street sweeper equipment. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GRADING 02310 -3 SECTION 02315 EXCAVATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavating for building volume below grade, footings, pile caps, slabs-on-grade, paving, site structures, and utilities within the building. B. Trenching for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. See Storm Water Management Plan and sheets C5.0, C6.0, C7.0 in construction documents: General requirements for dewatering of excavations and water control. B. Section 02310-Grading. C. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Fill materials, filling, and compacting. D. Section 02620 - Sub drainage: Filter aggregate and filter fabric for foundation drainage systems. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain. C. Protect benchmarks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. See Section 02310 for additional requirements. 3.02 EXCAVATING A. Underpin adjacent structures, which may be damaged by excavating work. B. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations. C. Notify Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. D. Slope banks of temporary excavations deeper than 5 feet to 1:1or less if approved by a soils engineer in lieu of shoring. E. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. F. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. G. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. H. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd measured by volume. See Section 02318 for removal of larger material. I. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed; see Section 02316. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center EXCAVATION 02315-1 J. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. K. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. L. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site in accordance with Section 02310. M. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 Test of Materials, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Provide for visual inspection of load-bearing excavated surfaces before placement of foundations. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability. B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center EXCAVATION 02315-2 SECTION 02316 FILL AND BACKFILL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for building volume below grade and paving. B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. C. Filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal (demolition) operations. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310 - Grading. B. Section 02315 - Excavation: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. C. Section 02620 - Sub drainage: Filter aggregate and filter fabric for foundation drainage systems. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand- Cone Method; 2000. B. ASTM D 1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2002. C. ASTM D 2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 1994(R 2001). D. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2004. E. ASTM D 3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2004. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. B. Sub grade Elevations: 4 inches below finish grade elevations indicated on drawings, unless otherwise indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. E. Material Certification: Prior to delivery of import soil materials to site, provide written certification acceptable to Geotechnical Engineer and Architect that all soil materials comply with, or exceeds, specified requirements. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FILL AND BACKFILL 02316 -1 B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated. 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. C. Verify that survey benchmarks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications 1. Installing Company: Company specializing in grading work, with minimum five years documented experience in projects of similar scale and scope. 2. Installing foreman: Individual specializing in grading work, with minimum five years documented experience in projects of similar scale and scope. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Conforming to Standard Specification for Public Works Construction ('Green Book'). B. Structural Fill: Conforming to see above 2.01A. C. Concrete for Fill: Lean concrete. D. Granular Fill: Coarse aggregate, conforming to see above 2.01A. E. Sand: Conforming to see above See 2.01A. F. Topsoil: See Section 02310. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven. Submit product data specifications to the Geo- technical engineer for approval prior to beginning of work. B. Vapor Retarder: 10 mil thick, polyethylene. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 Test of Materials, for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material. B. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site. C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. See Section 02310 for additional requirements. C. Verify sub drainage, damp proofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected. D. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support imposed loads by the fill. E. Protect all stakes and benchmarks. Replace all stakes and benchmarks damaged during the course of construction at no cost to Owner. F. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FILL AND BACKFILL 02316-2 3.02 PREPARATION A. Scarify and proof roll sub grade surface to a depth of 10 inches to identify soft spots. B. Cut out soft areas of sub grade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. C. Compact sub grade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. D. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.03 FILLING A. Fill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. Fill up to sub grade elevations unless otherwise indicated. C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy sub grade surfaces. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. F. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth. G. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth. H. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. I. Correct areas that are over-excavated. 1. Load-bearing foundation surfaces: Use structural fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 90 percent of maximum dry density. J. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: 1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 95 percent of maximum dry density. 2. At other locations: 90 percent of maximum dry density. K. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Filling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1/2 inch from required elevations. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 Test of Materials, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, ASTM D2922, or ASTM D3017. C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 1557 ("modified Proctor"). D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. E. Proof roll compacted fill at surfaces that will be under slabs-on-grade and paving. F. Perform earthwork under the continuous observation of the Owner's Geotechnical Engineer. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FILL AND BACKFILL 02316-3 Earthwork fill operations shall comply with the requirements of Section 3301.1, Part 2, Title 24, OCR. G. Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557. 1. The Geotechnical Engineer will review and approve all fill materials, including on-site materials and imported materials. 2. The Geotechnical Engineer will submit reports to the Architect, and Engineer, comparing results of testing with the requirements of this section and documenting location and scope of tested materials. G. If tests indicate that work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work replace and retest at no cost to owner. 3.06 CLEAN-UP A. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile. B. Remove unused stockpiled materials; leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. C. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FILL AND BACKFILL 02316-4 SECTION 02317 TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310 -Grading: Site grading. B. Section 02315-Excavation: Building and foundation excavating. C. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Backfilling at building and foundations. D. Section 02620 - Sub drainage: Filter aggregate and filter fabric for foundation drainage systems. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 2001 (2004). B. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2000a. C. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand- Cone Method; 2000. D. ASTM D 1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2002. E. ASTM D 2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method; 1994(R 2001). F. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2004. G. ASTM D 3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2004. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. B. Sub grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES 02317-1 B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where designated. 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. C. Verify that survey benchmarks and intended elevations for the work are as indicated. D. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain. E. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Conforming to Standard Specification for Public Works Construction ('Green Book1). B. Structural Fill: Conforming to Standard Specification for Public Works Construction ('Green Book'). C. Concrete for Fill: As specified in Section 03300; compressive strength of 2500 psi. D. Granular Fill: Coarse aggregate, conforming to State of California Highway Department standard. E. Topsoil: See Section 02310. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven. Submit product data specifications to the Geo- technical engineer for approval prior to beginning of work. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 Test of Materials, for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material. B. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site. C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. C. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities. D. See Section 02310 for additional requirements. 3.02 TRENCHING A. Notify Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. B. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or as approved by Geotechnical engineer until shored. C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES 02317-2 D. Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. F. Remove large stones and other hard matter that can damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. G. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. H. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site in accordance with Section 02310. I. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT A. Cut out soft areas of sub grade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. B. Compact sub grade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. C. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.04 BACKFILLING A. Backfill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials. B. Fill up to sub grade elevations unless otherwise indicated. C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy sub grade surfaces. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. F. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. G. Correct areas that are over-excavated. 1. Thrust bearing surfaces: Fill with concrete. 2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97 percent of maximum dry density. H. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: 1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 95 percent of maximum dry density. 2. At other locations: 95 percent of maximum dry density. I. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1/2 inch from required elevations. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 Test of Materials, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, ASTM D2922, or ASTM D3017. C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D 1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTOT180. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES 02317-3 D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. 3.07 CLEAN-UP A. Remove unused stockpiled materials; leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center TRENCHING FOR SITE UTILITIES 02317-4 SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and fittings for site water lines including domestic water lines and fire water lines. B. Valves, Fire hydrants, and Domestic water hydrants. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02315 - Excavation: Excavating of trenches. B. Section 02316-Fill and Backfill: Bedding and backfilling. C. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for thrust restraints. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AWWA C104/A21.4 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water; American Water Works Association; 2003 (ANSI/AWWAC104/A21.4). B. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; American Water Works Association; 2000 (ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11). C. AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water; American Water Works Association; 2002 (ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51). D. AWWA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service; American Water Works Association; 2001 (ANSI/AWWA C509). E. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances; American Water Works Association; 1999 (ANSI/AWWA C600). F. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; American Water Works Association; 2004. G. ASTM B 828 - Copper tubing. Pipe three (3) inches and less in diameter shall be hard copper tube, Type L with copper pressure fittings and soldered joints. Use ASTM B 813 water flushable, lead free flux; ASTM B 32 lead free alloy solder unless otherwise indicated. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, thrust restraints, and invert elevations. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with utility company requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER PIPE A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151: 1. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with rods. 3. Lining and Coating: Unless otherwise specified, the internal surfaces of iron pipe and fittings shall be lined with a uniform thickness of cement mortar then sealed with a Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510 -1 bituminous coating in accordance with AWWA C 104. The outside surfaces of ductile iron pipe and fittings for general use shall be coated with a bituminous coating one mil thick in accordance with AWWA C 151 or AWWA C 110. 2.02 VALVES A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. B. Gate Valves 3 Inches and Over 1. AWWA C509, iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with square nut, single wedge, resilient seat, flanged ends, control rod, post indicator, valve key, and extension box. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 Trade Names or Equals. 2.03 HYDRANTS A. Hydrants: Type as required by utility company. B. Hose and Streamer Connection: Match sizes with utility company, two hose nozzles, and one pumper nozzle. C. Finish: Primer and two coats of enamel in color required by utility company. 2.04 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Bedding: As specified in Section 02316. B. Cover: As specified in Section 02316. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Concrete for Thrust Restraints: Concrete type specified in Section 03300. B. Backflow Preventer: As indicated on drawings. C. Meter: As indicated on drawings. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and invert are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 TRENCHING A. See Sections 02315 and 02316 for additional requirements. B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. C. Form and place concrete for pipe thrust restraints at each change of pipe direction. Place concrete to permit full access to pipe and pipe accessories. Provide four sq ft thrust restraint bearing on subsoil. D. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. Maintain separation of water main from sewer piping in accordance with applicable code. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-2 B. Group piping with other site piping work whenever practical. C. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than three ft of cover. D. Install pipe to indicated elevation to within tolerance of 5/8 inches. E. Install ductile iron piping and fittings to AWWA C600. F. Install grooved and shouldered pipe joints to AWWA C606. G. Route pipe in straight line. H. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. I. Slope water pipe and position drains at low points. J. Install trace wire 6 inches above top of pipe; coordinate with Section 02317. 3.05 INSTALLATION-VALVES AND HYDRANTS A. Set valves on solid bearing. B. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade. C. Set hydrants plumb; locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to and facing roadway. D. Set hydrants to grade, with nozzles at least 20 inches above ground. E. Locate control valve 4 feet away from hydrant. 3.06 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide water service to utility company requirements with reduced pressure backflow preventer and water meter with by-pass valves and sand strainer. B. Anchor service main to interior surface of foundation wall. C. Provide 18 gage galvanized sheet metal sleeve surrounding service main to 6 inches above floor and 6 inches minimum below grade. Size for 2 inches minimum of glass fiber insulation stuffing. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 Test of Materials. B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Carlsbad City Library. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WATER DISTRIBUTION 02510-3 SECTION 02535 SANITARY SEWER PIPING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sanitary sewerage drainage piping, fittings, and accessories. B. Connection of building sanitary drainage system to municipal sewers. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02315 - Excavation: Excavating of trenches. B. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Bedding and backfilling. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2004a. B. ASTM A 746 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe; 2003. C. ASTM C 564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2003a. D. ASTM D 1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2004a. E. ASTM D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications; 2004. F. ASTM D 2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2003. G. ASTM D 2751 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 1996a. H. ASTM D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2004a. I. AWWA C111/A21.11 - American National Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints For Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; 2000. (ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe, pipe accessories. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products specified. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Project Record Documents: 1. Record location of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, cleanouts, and invert elevations. 2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of the Work of this section. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SANITARY SEWER PIPING 02535 -1 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the Work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building, connection to municipal sewer utility service, and trenching. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A 74, Service type, inside nominal diameter of 6 inches, hub and spigot end. B. Joint Seals for Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM C 564 rubber gaskets. C. Ductile Iron Pipe: ASTM A 746, Pressure Class 350, with asphaltic lining, inside nominal diameter of 6 inches, bell and spigot end. D. Joint Seals for Ductile Iron Pipe: AVWVA C111/A21.11 rubber gaskets. E. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2751, SDR 23.5, Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) material; inside nominal diameter of 6 inches, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end. F. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 2729, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; inside nominal diameter of 6 inches, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end. G. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 3034, Type PSM, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; inside nominal diameter of 6 inches, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end. H. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, Poly(Vmyl Chloride) (PVC) material; inside nominal diameter of 6 inches, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end. I. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required. 2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with "Sewer Service" in large letters. 2.03 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Pipe Bedding Material: As specified in Section 02316. B. Pipe Cover Material: As specified in Section 02316. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCHING A. See Sections 02315 and 02316 for additional requirements. B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. C. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.02 INSTALLATION-PIPE A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on layout drawings. B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal watertight. 1. Plastic Pipe: Also comply with ASTM D 2321. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SANITARY SEWER PIPING 02535 -2 C. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer's instructions. Seal joints watertight. D. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. E. Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet, through installed sleeves. F. Install trace wire 6 inches above top of pipe; coordinate with Section 02317. 3.03 INSTALLATION- CLEAN OUTS A. Form bottom of excavation dean and smooth to correct elevation. B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end sections. C. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated. D. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 Test of Materials. B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Carlsbad City Library. C. Pressure Test: Test in accordance with Greenbook 306-1.4.4. D. Infiltration Test: Test in accordance with Greenbook 306-1.4.2-3. E. Deflection Test: Test in accordance with Greenbook 306-1.12.12. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SANITARY SEWER PIPING 02535 -3 SECTION 02540 RESILIENT SURFACING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. A license to construct a Fibar System according to these specifications must first be obtained from Fibar, Inc., as licensor of the patent rights of Fibar Systems reflected in U.S. Patent numbers 4,679,963 5,026,207; 5,076,726; and other patents pending. Note: To preserve warranty, FibarMat wear mats must be installed under all swings and slide exits. 1. Provide Fibar System Playground Safety Surface in areas indicated on plans. 2. Provide safety surface immediately after installing playground equipment. 3. Fibar Systems, FibarMat, and FibarDrain are available from Local Representative: Name: Michael Etchison Phone: 800 264-7225 ext. 103 or directly from Fibar, Inc., Suite 300, 80 Business Park Dr., Armonk, NY 10504-1705. You can call £800-342-2721 or 6914-273-8770. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RESILIENT SURFACING A. Provide Fibar System No. 308 (choose system), wood fibres to a compacted depth of approximately 8" inches over FibarFelt (100% polyester, non-woven geotextile fabric) and FibarDrain drainage system (minimum flow rate of 10 gpm/ft). B. Provide FibarDrain 6' apart over entire play area and overlay with FibarFelt geotextile fabric. C. Provide one (1) FibarMat (minimum size: 36"x36"x1.5" rubber mat) under each swing, slide exit, and sliding pole. Total quantity required is 2. 2.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surfacing shall be a mix of random-sized, engineered wood fibers. Standard wood chips or bark mulch will not be acceptable. B. Supplier must provide test results for impact attenuation in accordance with ASTM F1292 Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation for Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment. Results must be provided for new material and for 12-year-old material. C. Testing must show "g" ratings of not more than 155g for the 8" thick system, or 120g for the 12" system at 12' fall heights, and HIC values of less than 1,000 for both new and 12-year-old material. D. Supplier must provide test results in accordance with ASTM F1951 (formerly PS83) Standard Specification for Determination of Accessibility of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment. E. Supplier must certify that the surface meets the intent of the Americans With Disabilities Act. F. Supplier must provide written manufacturer's 10-year warranty against loss of resiliency, lifetime warranty on FibarFelt fabric and FibarDrain material. G. Supplier must provide $10 million product liability insurance certificate with project owner Carlsbad City Library Learning Center RESILIENT SURFACING 02540 -1 named as certificate holder, prior to delivery. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install the FibarDrain System, FibarMats, and the Fibar material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specification drawings. B. Avoid contamination of the Fibar material with sand, gravel, mud, or native soil. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center RESILIENT SURFACING 02540 - 2 SECTION 02551 SITE GAS DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and fittings for natural gas distribution on site outside buildings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02315 - Excavation: Excavating of trenches. B. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Bedding and backfilling. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASME (BPVIX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004. B. ASME (BPV) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004. C. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2004a. D. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of pipe mains, valves, connections, and invert elevations. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with municipality requirements. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and applicable state regulations. C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME BPV, Section IX. D. Conform to NFPA 54. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labelling in place. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE A. Steel Pipe Above Ground: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40 black: 2.02 GAS COCKS AND VALVES A. Gas Cock and Pressure Regulating Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SITE GAS DISTRIBUTION 02551 -1 B. Gas Cocks Up to 2 Inches: 150 psig WOG, bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends with cast iron curb box, cover, and key. C. Pressure Regulating Valves: Single stage, malleable iron body, corrosion-resistant, pressure regulator with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; with threaded ends for 2 inch and smaller, flanged ends larger than 2 inch. 1. Capacity: For inlet and outlet gas pressures, specific gravity, and flow rate indicated. 2. Capacity: a. Inlet Gas Pressure 125 psig. b. Outlet Gas Pressure range: From 8 inches WG to 15 inches WG. c. Specific Gravity: 0.60. d. Flow Rate: 3000 cfh. 2.03 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS A. Bedding: As specified in Section 02317. B. Cover: As specified in Section 02317. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building service connection and utility gas main size, location and invert are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe over 2 inches diameter. Thread ferrous pipe 2 inches diameter and under. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections with flanges and unions. 3.03 TRENCHING A. See Section 02317 for additional requirements. B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated. C. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then complete backfilling. 3.04 INSTALLATION-PIPING A. Maintain separation of gas line from sewer piping in accordance with applicable code. B. Group piping with other site piping work whenever practical. C. Route piping in straight line. D. Install piping to conserve space and not interfere with use of site space. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. F. Install cocks and other fittings. G. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 24 inches of cover in non-travelled areas and 48 inches of cover in driveways and parking areas. H. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished ground surface. Prevent shock or stress from being transmitted through valve box to valve. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SITE GAS DISTRIBUTION 02551 -2 I. Wrap valve and valve box with polyethylene tape and heat shrink. J. Paint valves and valve boxes with rust inhibitive primer and one coat of epoxy paint. 3.05 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide sleeve in foundation wall for gas service main. Seal enlarged sleeve watertight. B. Anchor service main to interior surface of foundation wall. C. Install service regulator adjacent to building wall in specified location. D. Install service regulator and riser pipe to prevent undue stress upon service pipe. E. Provide regulator vent with rain and insect proof opening, terminating away from building openings. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 Test of Materials. B. Pressure test gas piping to 50 psi. C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Carlsbad City Library. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SITE GAS DISTRIBUTION 02551 -3 SECTION 02620 SUBDRAINAGE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building Perimeter and Under-Slab Drainage Systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02315 - Excavation: Excavating for subdrainage system piping and surrounding filter aggregate. B. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Backfilling over filter aggregate, up to subgrade elevation. C. Section 07140 - Sheet Applied Waterproofing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vmyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout of piping, high and low points of pipe inverts, gradient of slope between corners and intersections. C. Product Data: Provide data on pipe drainage products, and pipe accessories D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Project Record Documents: Record location of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts and principal invert elevations. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for materials and installation of the work of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE MATERIALS A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: ASTM D 2729; plain end, 4 inch inside diameter; with required fittings. B. Use perforated pipe at subdrainage system; unperforated through sleeved walls. 2.02 AGGREGATE AND BEDDING A. Filter Aggregate and Bedding Material: Granular fill as specified in Section 02316. B. Impervious Fill Material: General fill as specified in Section 02316. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Couplings: Solid plastic. B. Joint Covers: 10 mil thick polyethylene. C. Filter Fabric: Water pervious type, black polyolefin. D. Sleeve: Rigid Plastic sch 80 type for foundation wall. PARTS EXECUTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SUBDRAINAGE 02620 -1 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on layout Drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over-excavation with lean concrete. B. Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage drainage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install and join pipe and pipe fittings in accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions. B. Place drainage pipe on clean cut subsoil. C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on Drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. D. Loosely butt pipe ends. Place joint cover strip 12 inches wide, around pipe diameter centered over joint. E. Place pipe with perforations facing down. Mechanically join pipe ends. F. Install pipe couplings. G. Install filter aggregate at sides, over joint covers and top of pipe. Provide top cover compacted thickness of 12 inches. H. Place filter fabric over levelled top surface of aggregate cover prior to subsequent backfilling operations. I. Place aggregate in maximum 4 inch lifts, consolidating each lift. J. Refer to Section 02316 for compaction requirements. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting. K. Place impervious fill over drainage pipe aggregate cover and compact. L. Connect to storm sewer system with unperforated pipe. M. Coordinate the Work with connection to municipal sewer utility service, and trenching. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 Test of Materials. B. Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing aggregate cover over pipe. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation begins. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SUBDRAINAGE 02620 -2 SECTION 02721 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aggregate base course. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310 - Grading: Preparation of site for base course. B. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Compacted fill under base course. C. Section 02741 - Bituminous Concrete Paving: Binder and finish asphalt courses. D. Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Finish concrete surface course. E. Section 02843 - Parking Bumpers: Concrete bumpers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates; 2005. B. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/tt3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2000a. C. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand- Cone Method; 2000. D. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2000. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. Aggregate Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports. E. R-valve test data. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide sufficient quantities of aggregate to meet project schedule and requirements. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. B. When aggregate materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated. 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. C. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Coarse Aggregate: Pit run washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C 136, within the following limits: a. 2 inch sieve: 100 percent passing. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 02721 -1 b. 1 inch sieve: 95 percent passing. c. 3/4 inch sieve: 95 to 100 percent passing. d. 5/8 inch sieve: 75 to 100 percent passing. e. 3/8 inch sieve: 55 to 85 percent passing. f. No. 4 sieve: 35 to 60 percent passing. g. No. 16 sieve: 15 to 35 percent passing, h. No. 40: 10 to 25 percent passing. i. No. 200: 5 to 10 percent passing. B. Blended Aggregate: Pit run washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C 136, within the following limits: a. 2 inch sieve: 100 percent passing. b. 1 inch sieve: 100 percent passing. c. 3/4 inch sieve: 95 to 100 percent passing. d. 5/8 inch sieve: 88 to 95 percent passing. e. 3/8 inch sieve: 72 to 88 percent passing. f. No. 4 sieve: 46 to 60 percent passing. g. No. 16 sieve: 28 to 42 percent passing, h. No. 40: 10 to 25 percent passing. i. No. 200: 2 to 7 percent passing. C. Medium Aggregate: Natural stone, pea gravel; washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C 136, within the following limits: a. Minimum Size: 1/4 inch. b. Maximum Size: 5/8 inch. D. Fine Aggregate: Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter. 1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C 136; within the following limits: a. No. 4 sieve: 100 percent passing. b. No. 14 sieve: 10 to 100 percent passing. c. No. 50 sieve: 5 to 90 percent passing. d. No. 100 sieve: 4 to 30 percent passing. e. No. 200 sieve: 0 percent passing. E. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 Test of Materials, for general requirements for testing and analysis of aggregate materials. B. Where aggregate materials are specified using ASTM D 2487 classification, test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site. C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate has been inspected, gradients and elevations are correct, and is dry. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Correct irregularities in substrate gradient and elevation by scarifying, reshaping, and re- compacting. B. Do not place aggregate on soft, muddy, or frozen surfaces. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 02721 - 2 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Determine R-valve and submit data to Geotechnical engineer to determine final section. B. Under Bituminous Concrete Paving: 1. Place coarse aggregate to a total compacted thickness of 6 inches. 2. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. C. Under Portland Cement Concrete Paving: 1. Place coarse aggregate to a total compacted thickness of 4 inches. 2. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. D. Place aggregate in maximum 4 inch layers and roller compact to specified density. E. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated. F. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction. G. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content. H. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge. B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch. C. Variation From Design Elevation: Within 1/2 inch. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 Test of Materials, for general requirements for testing and analysis of aggregate materials. B. See Section 01400 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. C. Compaction density testing will be performed on compacted aggregate base course in accordance with ASTM D1556. D. Results will be evaluated in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"). E. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. F. Frequency of Tests: Daily. G. Proof roll compacted aggregate at surfaces that will be under slabs-on-grade. 3.06 CLEAN-UP A. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 02721 - 3 SECTION 02741 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single course bituminous concrete paving. B. Double course bituminous concrete paving. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310 - Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base. B. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Compacted sub grade for paving. C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Pavement markings. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Al MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types; The Asphalt Institute; 1994, Sixth Edition. B. ASTM D 946 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction; 1982 (Reapproved 1999). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of California Highways standard. B. Mixing Plant: Conform to State of California Highways standard. C. Obtain materials from same source throughout. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 946. B. Aggregate for Binder Course: In accordance with State of California Highways standards. 2.02 ASPHALT PAVING MIXES AND MIX DESIGN A. Binder Course: 4.5 to 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with Al B. Wearing Course: 5 to 7 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with Al MS-2. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - SINGLE COURSE A. Install Work in accordance with State of Highways standards. B. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat. C. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment. D. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks. 3.02 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - DOUBLE COURSE A. Place asphalt binder course within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 02741 -1 B. Place wearing course within two hours of placing and compacting binder course. C. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment. D. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BITUMINOUS CONCRETE PAVING 02741 - 2 SECTION 02751 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete sidewalks, stair steps, integral curbs, gutters, and parking areas. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02310 - Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base and preparation of subsoil at pavement perimeter for planting. B. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill: Compacted subbase for paving. C. Section 02721 - Aggregate Base Course. D. Section 02843 - Parking Bumpers: Precast concrete parking bumpers. E. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. F. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints. G. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Pavement markings. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. D. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999. E. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988. F. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2002. G. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2004b. H. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003. I. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2004a. J. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2004a. K. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2004a. L ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly M ixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2001. M. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2003. N. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02751 -1 O. ASTM D 1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction; 2004a. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design paving for parking and light duty commercial vehicles. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compound. C. Design Data: Indicate pavement thickness, designed concrete strength, reinforcement, and typical details. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI301. B. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301. B. Joint Filler: Preformed; non-extruding bituminous type (ASTM D 1751) or sponge rubber or cork (ASTM D 1752). 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 40 (280); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish. B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plain type, ASTM A 185; in flat sheets; galvanized. C. Dowels: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 40 (280); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 03300. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1-D, Class A. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. C. Concrete Properties: Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02751 -2 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3000 psi. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 4. Silica Fume Content: Maximum 5 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 5. Cement Content: Minimum 564 Ib per cubic yard. 6. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 7. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 8. Maximum Slump: 3 inches. 9. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch. 2.06 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. 3.02 SUBBASE A. See Section 02721 for construction of base course for work of this Section. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. B. Notify Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. 3.04 FORMING A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient. B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete. C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcement at midheight of slabs-on-grade. B. Interrupt reinforcement at contraction joints. C. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. C. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur. 3.07 JOINTS A. Align curia, gutter, and sidewalk joints. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02751 -3 B. Place 3/8 inch wide expansion joints at 20 foot intervals and to separate paving from vertical surfaces and other components and in pattern indicated. 1. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/2 inch of finished surface. 2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. C. Provide scored joints: 1. At locations indicated. 2. Between sidewalks and curbs. 3. Between curbs and pavement. D. Provide keyed joints as indicated. 3.08 FINISHING A. Area Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to pavement direction. B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and radiused edge 1/4 inch radius. C. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, texture parallel to pavement direction. 0. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Broomed perpendicular to slope. E. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.09 JOINT SEALING A. See Section 07900 for joint sealer requirements. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4. 1. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. 2. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. 3. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. 1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02751 -4 B. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after finishing. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02751 -5 SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping, valves, sprinklers, controls, and wiring. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water supply piping, water meters, and backflow preventers. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Lateral Piping: Downstream: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow. B. Pressure Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to and including control valves. Piping is under water distribution system pressure. C. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. NP: Nylon plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PP: Polypropylene plastic. 5. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 6. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. B. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Pressure Piping: 200 psi. 2. Lateral Piping: 150 psi. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit a list of irrigation equipment to be used, accompanied by manufacturer's catalog data, specifications, or other literature clearly indicating compliance with specification requirements for each item. 2. Submit manufacturer's maintenance manuals and operating instructions for valves and automatic controllers. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-1 3. On the inside of the enclosure of the cover of each automatic controller enclosure, prepare and mount a color coded chart showing the valves and sprinkler heads serviced by that particular controller. Number valves to match the operation schedule and the drawings. Only those areas controlled by that controller shall be shown. The chart shall be a plot plan, entire or partial, showing building(s), walks, roads and walls. A photostatic print of this plan, reduced as necessary and legible in all details, shall be made to a size that will fit into the controller cover. This print shall be reviewed and shall be hermetically sealed by plastic, and then be secured to the inside of the controller enclosure. 4. Prepare and submit addition copies of color coded irrigation map as follows: 2-11 inches x 17 inches laminated copy 1-8 inches x 11 inches laminated copy 1-11 inches x 17 inches non-laminated copy B. Record Drawings: Before final acceptance, make sure the following information is included on the record set of drawings specified. 1. Changes in location of items or type of installations from that indicated. 2. Valves shall be numbered and corresponding numbers shall be shown. 3. Mainline, remote control valves, shut-off valves, quick coupler valves, control wiring, and flow sensor conduit shall be located by measured dimensions. Dimensions shall be given to permanent objects and shall be to the nearest one-half foot. 4. Immediately upon the installation of buried pipe or equipment, indicate the locations of said equipment. Dimensions shall be given from permanent objects such as buildings, sidewalks, curbs, and driveways. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre-installation Conference 1. Before starting installation of the sprinkler system, the irrigation contractor shall organize a conference with representatives of the Irrigation Installer, the General Contractor and the Landscape Architect in attendance. 2. The pre-installation conference shall review methods and procedures related to landscaping and irrigation work to assure a clear understanding of the drawings and specifications, resolve possible conflicts and establish coordination between all parties involved. Review required inspection and testing procedures. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Comply with requirements the City of San Diego Water Utilities Department for preventing backflow and back siphonage. D. Comply with ASTM F 645, "Guide for Selection, Design, and Installation of Thermoplastic Water Pressure Piping Systems." E. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between wiring and electrically operated devices. F. Furnish plastic pipe and fittings permanently marked with size, class, and type of pipe, working pressure at 73.4 degrees F, and National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) rating. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Carlsbad City Library Learning Center IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-2 A. Because of the nature of plastic pipe and fittings, exercise caution in handling, loading and storing, to avoid damage. B. Transport pipe in a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the length of pipe to lay flat so as not to be subjected to undue bending or concentrated external load at any point. Support pipe during storage from sagging and bending. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. C. Discard pipe that has been dented or damaged unless such dent or damaged section is cut and rejoined with a coupling. D. Protect valves, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install landscape headers, sidewalks, and mowing strips before installation of sprinkler system, except that sleeves and mainlines under paving shall be in place before paving construction. B. Specimen trees (24 inches box and larger) shall be installed before the location of the irrigation system. C. Coordinate lawn sprinkler piping with utility work. D. Obtain permission, in writing, from the Landscape Architect at least 2 working days before shutting off existing in-use water lines. The Contractor shall receive instructions from the Owner as to the exact length of time of each shut-off. Notify the Landscape Architect. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver the following items to the Landscape Architect when construction activities in connection with the irrigation system are completed and before final acceptance of the Work: 1. Two (2) Quick Coupler keys with hose bibb attachments. 2. Two (2) wrenches for removing each different type of sprinkler heads. 3. Four (4) keys for opening and locking each automatic controller. 4. All manufacturer's warranty information stating length of warranty and how to exercise warranty on all valves, irrigation controllers and sprinkler heads. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The design of the irrigation system is based on the manufacturers and products specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. Substitutions will be permitted only with the Architects or Landscape Architect approval. Where such substitution will change the coverage or flow rates of the sprinkler heads, the request for substitution shall include layout plans showing revised sprinkler head locations. Such revised layout plan shall provide coverages and watering rates equivalent to those indicated. The Landscape Architect shall be notified of any design changes or substitutions. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-3 2.02 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" and 'Valve Applications" articles for application of pipe and tube materials, joining methods, and valve applications. 2.03 PIPES AND TUBES A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedules 40 and 80. B. PVC Pressure-Rated Pipe: ASTM D 2241; PVC 1120 compound; Class 315 (SDR 13.5). 2.04 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS A. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 40: ASTM D 2466. B. PVC Socket Fittings, Schedule 80: ASTM D 2467. C. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464. 2.05 JOINING MATERIALS A. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 2.06 FLOW SENSORS A. The flow sensor shall be a spinning impeller type, brass or PVC tee as required. Sized to accurately read irrigation system designed flow maximum and minimum (per technical specification of manufacturer). Manufactured by Calsense. 2.07 MASTER VALVES A. The master valve shall be normally closed, solid brass (ASTM B584, B271, B505), self- cleaning, automatic electric globe valve with manual flow control stem. Valve shall operate with pressures to 200 psi and shall be slow closing with a one-piece molded diaphragm incorporated with an integral O-ring seal reinforced with 600 pound test fabric and be guaranteed for 15 years. Equip with an internal self-flushing filter and self-cleaning metering rod for dirty water. Plunger and solenoid stem shall be electroless nickel plated for corrosion protection. The 24 VAC 3-way solenoid coil shall be guaranteed for the life of the valve. Valve shall be as manufactured by Weathermatic model 8200CR. 2.08 VALVES AND VALVE ASSEMBLIES A. Remote Control Valves: Normally closed electrically actuated diaphragm type, corrosion and UV-resistant PVC material construction. Including a 24-volt solenoid, one-piece epoxy encapsulated and coated, operate on 2 watts real power. Diaphragm one-piece molded construction with integral "O" ring seal reinforced with 600-pound test fabric. Capable of multi- angle installation and manual slow closing operation without electrical power. Valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Manufacturing Corporation, or approved equal. B. Quick Coupler Assembly: Two-piece unit consisting of a coupler water seal valve assembly and a removable quick connecting coupler key designed to allow spring and key track to be Carlsbad City Library Learning Center IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-4 serviced without shutdown of main. A positive, watertight connection shall be made between coupler key and valve. 1. Coupler Valve: Double lugged type, [3/4 inch] [1 inch] size, designed to withstand a working pressure of 150 psi. Bodies of valves shall be red brass. Provide valves with lockable hinged covers with springs for positive closure on key removal. Covers shall be red brass with a permanently bonded rubber-like vinyl cover, purple in color. 2. Quick Coupler Key: Brass or bronze with a hose bibb assembly. C. Check Valves 1. 2 Inches and Smaller Valves on Nonpressure Lines: MSS SP 80, Type 3, brass, bronze, or plastic, 100 pound class, vertical spring loaded and swing check. 2. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger Valves on Pressure Lines: MSS SP 85, cast iron, 150 pound class, with no slam feature. D. Ball Valves: Type I, Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) type 1220, of double true union design, with Teflon seats and Viton "O" rings. Valve shall have a pressure rating of 150 psi (10.5 kg/sq cm). PVC Ball Valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller only. E. Anti-Drain Valves: Plastic construction, with soft composition disc, stainless steel internal parts, and with spring tension adjustable from 4 psi to 15 psi. Valves shall prevent low head drainage quickly and positively after RCV shut-off. 1. 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Bronze or cast-iron body with flanged ends. 3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. F. Valve Boxes: Boxes adjacent to paved areas subject to vehicular traffic shall be precast concrete with cast iron lids designed to resist vehicular traffic. Concrete valve boxes shall have lockable covers. Boxes in all other areas shall be plastic valve boxes with lockable covers with stainless steel bolts. Minimum sizes of valve boxes shall be as follows: 1. Remote Control Valves: 16 inches by 10 inches. 2. Drip valves: 16 inches by 10 inches. 3. Gate, Globe, and Ball Valves: 8-3/4 inches diameter. 4. Drainage backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inches to 3/8 inches. 2.09 SPRINKLERS A. Pop-up Spray Type: Full or part circle pop-up spray type sprinkler body, stem, nozzle and screen constructed of heavy-duty plastic. The sprinkler shall have a soft wiper seal for cleaning debris from pop-up stem as it retracts into case to prevent sprinkler from sticking up. The sprinkler shall have a matched precipitation rate plastic nozzle with an adjusting screw capable of regulating the radius and flow. The sprinkler shall have a strong stainless steel retract spring for positive pop down. Pop-up height shall be as indicated. The sprinkler head shall have a screen under the nozzle to protect it from clogging and for easy removal for cleaning and flushing system. The sprinkler head shall have a bottom inlet and may have a side inlet for ease of installation. Use only the bottom inlet for sprinkler heads equipped with anti-drain devices. B. Fixed Shrub Spray Type: Full or part circle fixed shrub spray type sprinkler, three-piece design including a screen. The sprinkler body and nozzle shall be molded of plastic. The sprinkler nozzle shall be of same type as described above. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-5 2.10 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM A. The number and location of the Automatic Controller Units shall be as shown on the drawings and shall be as manufactured and assembled by Calsense California Sensor Corporation (800- 572-8608). The City's Irrigation Control System Specialist shall be contacted for confirmation prior to placing equipment order. B. The Calsense Automatic Controller Unit with model number ET 2000 shall be a water management computer using the Motorola 68000 micro processor, with internal individual phone modem (not wire linkable), and a Calsense integrated radio remote receiver board. C. The CCU shall be wall mounted. 2.11 RAIN GAUGE EQUIPMENT A. Type used is a tipping rain bucket as manufactured by Calsense, Carlsbad, CA, model RB-1. Conduit for roof mounting (including U-channel wall mounting brackets) shall meet Division 16 requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Before start of installation of the irrigation system, examine the site to: 1. Verify location of existing underground utilities, valves, manholes, catch basins, and other appurtenances that will affect the layout of the sprinkler system. 2. Verify location of existing trees, new specimen trees, and other obstructions that will affect the layout of the sprinkler system. 3. Verify location of stub outs and points of connection to the water supply system. 4. Verify grades to determine that work may safely proceed, keeping within the specified trench depths. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Locations indicated are diagrammatic and approximate only and shall be changed and adjusted as necessary and as directed to meet existing conditions and obtain complete water coverage. B. Sprinkler lines shall have a minimum clearance of 6 inches from each other and from other utility lines. Do not install parallel lines directly over one another. C. Stake out locations of all pipe, valves, equipment and irrigation heads using an approved staking method and maintain the staking of the approved layout until installation is completed. 3.03 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. B. Refer to Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving" for cutting and patching asphalt paving. C. Refer to Division 2 Section "Portland Cement Concrete Paving" for cutting and patching concrete paving. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-6 D. Refer to Division 2 Section "Tree Protection and Trimming" for irrigation installation under the canopies of existing trees. E. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grades, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavement and slabs. F. Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and railroads. G. When trenching through areas where topsoil has been spread, deposit topsoil on one side of trench and subsoil on opposite side. H. Provide sand bedding a minimum of extending 2 inches under, around and 2 inches above top of pipe for PVC plastic pipe and brass piping. I. Trench width shall be 4 inches + pipe outside diameter. J. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: 1. Pressure Piping: 18 inches (to top of pipe) below finish grade 2. Lateral Piping: 12 inches (to top of pipe). 3. Drain Piping: 12 inches (300 mm). 4. Sleeves: 24 inches (600 mm). 3.04 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Construct underground joints between cast-iron valves and PVC pipe with elastomeric seals that fit pipe and valve ends. Use lubricant according to ASTMD3139. B. Dissimilar Piping Material Joints: Construct joints using adapters or couplings that are compatible with both piping materials, outside diameters, and system working pressure. 3.05 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping systems, which were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 1. Pipe shall be cut using approved PVC pipe cutters only. Sawed joints will not be permitted. All field cuts shall be beveled to remove burrs and excess before fitting and gluing together. 2. Pipe ends and fittings shall be wiped with MEK, or other primer recommended by the pipe manufacturer, before welding solvent is applied. Socket joints shall be made in accordance with recommended procedures for joining PVC plastic pipe and fittings with PVC solvent cement by the pipe and fitting manufacturer and procedures outlined in the Appendix of ASTM D 2564. Welded joints shall be given a minimum of 15 minutes to set before moving or handling. 3. When connection is plastic to metal, PVC female adapters shall be used with short (not close) brass threaded nipples if needed to complete the connection. Joints shall be made with 2 wraps of Teflon tape and hand tightened plus one turn with a strap wrench. 4. Assemble and place pipe fines having rubber ring seal joints in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Snake pipe from side-to-side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction. 6. Center load pipe with small amount of backfill to prevent arching and slipping under pressure. Leave joints exposed for inspection during testing. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-7 7. No water shall be permitted in the pipe until inspections have been completed and a period of at least 24 hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing. 8. At changes of direction of 45 degrees or more for pipes 2-1/2 inches and larger, construct concrete thrust blocks against undisturbed earth with sufficient bearing to resist the thrust of water. C. Install piping free of sags and bends. D. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. F. Install unions adjacent to valves and final connections to other components with 2-inch NFS (DN50) or smaller pipe connection. G. Install flanges adjacent to valves and final connections to other components with 2-1/2-inch NFS (DN65) or larger pipe connection. H. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping of dissimilar metals. I. Tracer Wires. 1. Install tracer wire on all nonmetallic (plastic) irrigation main lines. 2. Place the tracer wire on the bottom of the trench under the vertical projection of the pipe. Splice and solder joints and cover them with insulation type tape. 3. Tracer wire shall follow the main line pipe and branch lines and terminate in the yard box with the control valves. Provide enough length of wire or tape to make a loop and attach a" Dymo-Tape" type plastic label with the designation "Tracer Wire". J. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. K. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C). Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperature above 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) before testing, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. L. Install water regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and pressure gage on outlet. Install shutoff valve on outlet. M. Water Hammer Arresters: Install between connection to building main and circuit valves in valve box. 3.06 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Remote Control Valves: Install remote control valves in locations indicated, with a cover of 8 inches minimum over top of flow control stem. Install a union type connection. Fit each valve with a valve box; set over 1 cubic foot of pea gravel, a cover, and concrete bricks under each comer of valve box. B. Drip/low volume valve manifold assemblies: each manifold shall have a separate ball valve, filter, preset pressure regulator and remote control valve. C. Quick Coupler Assembly: Set valves plumb and true to finish grade and a maximum of 12 inches from paving, walks, headers or curbs. Connect to PVC pressure piping with brass nipple set in a concrete thrust block as indicated. D. Valve Boxes: Install valve boxes as indicated. Install no more than one valve per box. Stencil valve number and controller letter on valve box and valve box lid. All plastic valve boxes shall be secured with a stainless steel locking bolt mechanism. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-8 3.07 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Flush circuit piping with full head of water and install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed 6. Install all drip emitters per instructions on plans and per manufacturer's instructions. C. Install low-volume spray jets as shown in details. After spray jets are installed, under no circumstances should pressures be set in excess of 30 psi. Recommended operating pressure is 20 psi. D. Set sprinkler heads plumb and true to finished grade. E. Nozzle size of heads shall be adjusted to suit any particular conditions of the area. This shall be done after the system has been thoroughly tested, immediately after written notification by the Architect to do so. F. Locate part-circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 4 inches (100 mm) from walls and 2 inches (50 mm) from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated. 3.08 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Automatic Sprinkler Controller Test the controller after completion of electrical connections. Provide temporary power to the controller for operation and testing. 1. Make connections to control wiring within the enclosure of the controller. All wire shall follow the pressure main insofar as possible. 2. Install electrical wiring from controller to electrical outlet or junction box in rigid PVC plastic conduit. Installation of wiring and disconnect switch to the subpanels, clocks, or elsewhere as required, in order to complete this installation is specified in Division 16. B. Grounding 1. Each controller shall be grounded by means that conform to the requirements of the National Electrical Code, current edition as adopted by the city, and the manufacturers specifications. No solder connections will be allowed. Resistance to ground shall be no greater than 5 ohms. C. Pull Boxes 1. Pull boxes shall be installed at intervals not to exceed two hundred feet and at each location that the installation of the conduit shall be phased. 2. Pull boxes shall be installed in planted areas whenever possible. 3. The bottom shall be bedded in pea gravel six inches deep and one half inch of grout prior to installation of irrigation interconnect. Install four concrete bricks under each valve box. D. Control Equipment Inspection 1. The contractor shall demonstrate the functionality of the controller to the Landscape Architect prior to the start of the maintenance period. All tests shall be made to the satisfaction of the Landscape Architect. Each circuit shall be tested for continuity. a. Each circuit shall be tested for leaks to ground with an ohmmeter after each interconnect circuit has been installed and connections have been made. No circuit checking lower than 1 megohm will be acceptable. b. The grounding system shall be tested with a meter and shall not measure more than 5 ohms. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-9 c. A functional test shall be made in which it is demonstrated that each and every part of the system functions as specified or intended. The test may commence only with the approval of the Landscape Architect. d. The functional test for each new or modified electrical system shall consist of not less than five days of continuous, satisfactory operation. If unsatisfactory performance of the system develops, the condition shall be corrected and the test shall be repeated until the five days of continuous satisfactory operation are obtained. e. Shutdown caused by factors beyond the contractors control shall not constitute discontinuity of the functional test. f. Any material revealed by these tests to be faulty shall be replaced or corrected, and the same test shall be repeated until no fault is evident. g. Results of circuitry tests shall be recorded and submitted to the Landscape Architect. 3.09 CONNECTIONS A. Connect piping to valves, sprinklers, and specialties. B. Connect water supplies to irrigation sprinkler piping with backflow preventers at connections to potable-water supplies. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Ground electric-powered controllers, valves, and devices. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. E. Arrange for electric-power connections to controllers, control valves, and devices that require power. Electric power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections. 3.10 REMOTE CONTROL WIRING A. Provide one control wire and one common ground wire to service each valve in system. Provide 4-foot minimum expansion loop at each valve to permit removal and maintenance of valves. B. Install control wires at least 12 inches below finish grade and minimum of 4 inches from pipe or fittings except at terminal points. C. Install control wires and irrigation piping in common trenches wherever possible. D. Control Wire Splices: Allow only on runs of more than 300 feet, spliced as follows: 1. Strip off minimum of 2-1/2 inches of insulation from each wire. 2. Twist on Scotchlock electrical spring connector, minimum 4 complete turns. 3. Seal connector in epoxy resin. 4. Tape completed splice with Scotch 3M electrical tape. E. Numbering and Tagging: Identify direct burial control wires from automatic valves to terminal strips of controller at terminal strip by tagging wire with number of connected valve. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-10 F. Spare Wires: Install one spare control wire to master valve, one spare control wire to each valve manifold. Provide 3 separate spare control wires to last valve manifold on mainline. Loop 3 separate spare wires into valve box at each valve manifold location along mainline. Provide 4-foot minimum expansion loop at each valve to permit removal and maintenance of valves. G. Pull Boxes 1. Pull boxes shall be installed at intervals not to exceed two hundred feet and at each location that the installation of the conduit shall be phased. 2. Pull boxes shall be installed in planted areas whenever possible. 3. The bottom shall be bedded in pea gravel six inches deep and one half inch of grout prior to installation of irrigation interconnect. Install four concrete bricks under valve box. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Hydrostatically test piping and valves before backfilling trenches. Piping may be tested in sections. 1. Cap and test piping with static water pressure of 50 psi above system operating pressure and without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. 2. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. B. Inspection: In cases where inspection of the sprinkler system construction is required or where portions of the construction are specified to be performed under the direction or inspection of the Landscape Architect, notify the Landscape Architect at least 3 working days in advance of the time such inspection or direction is required. C. Inspection will be required for the following parts of the construction: 1. Upon installation and testing of main lines and lateral lines; when pipes are laid and are to be submitted to pressure tests. Do not cover lines until they have been inspected and approved. 2. Upon installation and testing of valves, quick couplers, backflow preventer device, automatic controllers, control valves, and wires. 3. When the sprinkler system is completed, perform a coverage test, in the presence of the Landscape Architect, to determine if the coverage of water afforded the lawn and planting areas is complete and adequate. Furnish materials and perform construction required to correct inadequacies in the coverage. 4. Final inspection and performance test shall be at the same time as the final inspection of the landscape construction. 3.12 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices. B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit. C. Carefully adjust lawn sprinklers so they will be flush with, or not more than 1/2 inch above, finish grade. D. Adjust settings of controllers and automatic control valves. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-11 As project progresses, maintain the site in a neat manner and remove unsightly debris as necessary. After completion of construction, remove debris and containers used in accomplishing construction. Daily sweep and clean sidewalks, asphalt, and concrete areas adjacent to plantings. 3.13 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate to Owner's maintenance personnel operation of equipment, sprinklers, specialties, and accessories. Review maintenance information. B. Provide seven days' advance written notice of demonstration. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-12 SECTION 02843 PARKING BUMPERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Precast concrete parking bumpers and anchorage. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2004b. B. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003. C. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2004a. D. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2001. E. ASTM C 330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2004. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide unit configuration, dimensions. C. Samples: Submit two concrete bumper units, illustrating surface finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Parking Bumpers: Precast concrete, conforming to the following: 1. Nominal Size: 6 inches high, 8 inches wide, 3 feet long. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Cement: ASTM C 150, Portland Type I - Normal; white color. 4. Concrete Materials: ASTM C 33 aggregate, water, and sand. 5. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed steel bars; unfinished finish, strength and size commensurate with precast unit design. 6. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. 7. Concrete Mix: Minimum 5000 psi, 28 day strength, air entrained to 5 to 7 percent. 8. Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape, size and finish. Maintain consistent quality during manufacture. 9. Embed reinforcing steel, and drill or sleeve for two dowels. 10. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. 11. Minor patching in plant is acceptable, providing appearance of units is not impaired. B. Dowels: Steel, galvanized finish; 1/2 inch diameter, 24 inch long, pointed tip. C. Adhesive: Epoxytype. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged) units. B. Install units in alignment with adjacent work. C. Fasten units in place with 2 dowels per unit. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PARKING BUMPERS 02843 -1 END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PARKING BUMPERS 02843 -2 SECTION 02930 EXTERIOR PLANTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Trees. 2. Shrubs. 3. Ground cover. 4. Plants. 5. Root barriers. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, filling, and rough grading. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. B. Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments. C. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: Organic mulch. C. Product certificates. D. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants. E. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of exterior plants during a calendar year. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer who maintains an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when exterior planting is in progress. B. Soil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory. C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock." D. Measurements: Measure trees and shrubs according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above ground for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above ground for larger sizes. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip-to-tip. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 -1 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site. B. Trees and Shrubs: Deliver healthy, trees and shrubs, container-grown by a certified nursery. Do not prune before delivery, except as approved by Architect. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sunscald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop trees and shrubs during delivery. C. Handle container stock by the container, handle balled and buhapped stock by the root ball. D. Deliver trees, shrubs, ground covers, and plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set planting materials in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 2. Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition. E. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Utilities: Determine location of above grade and underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will safely avoid damaging utilities. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. B. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, putrefying soil, contaminants or obstructions, notify Architect before planting. 1.07 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required. 1.08 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Warrant the following living planting materials for the period specified after date of Substantial Completion, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, abnormal weather conditions unusual for warranty period, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 2 1. Trees: One year. 2. Shrubs, vines and ground covers: 90 days. C. Remove and replace dead plant materials within 14 days unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. D. Replace planting materials that are in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. E. A limit of one replacement of each plant material will be required, except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain lawns, plants, trees and shrubs by mowing, edging, pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required, maintaining trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. Maintain landscaping for the following period: 1. Maintenance Period: 90 days following completion and acceptance of all landscape work. B. The maintenance period shall be extended when, in the opinion of the Architect, improper maintenance has been provided. Continue maintenance until landscaping is acceptable to the Architect. C. Remove trash from planting areas during maintenance period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs conforming to ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully-branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades conforming to ANSI Z60.1 for type of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable to the Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. C. Label at least 1 tree and 1 shrub of each variety and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. 2.02 GROUND COVERS AND PLANTS A. Provide ground covers and plants established and well rooted in removable containers or integral peat pots and with not less than the minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for the pot size indicated. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 3 2.03 TOPSOIL A. Class A Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic material minimum, free of stones 3/8" inch or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 40% amended sandy loam topsoil, blended with nitrolized wood shavings, humus and gypsum. Equal to: 'A-1 San Diego Select Topsoil' B. Site Topsoil: Amend existing surface soil to produce topsoil as follows: Actual rates of amendments shall be in accordance with the agricultural soils testing and report. 1. Lawn Areas: a. Soil conditioner: 5 cubic yards/1000 sq. ft. b. Gypsum: 120 lbs./1000 sq. ft. c. Soil activator: 150lbs./1000 sq. ft. 2. Shrub Areas (under 2:1) in slope: a. Soil conditioner: 3 cubic yards/1000 sq. ft. b. Gypsum: 120 lbs./1000 sq. ft. c. Soil activator: 150 lbs./1000 sq. ft. 2.04 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Soil Conditioner: Proprietary blend of organic fractions to supply several degrees of breakdown rate; a portion of inorganic amendment that resists further breakdown, a long- lasting form of iron with PH of 5.5 to 6.0, salinity of 1.75, organic matter (dry weight basis) more than 90 %; nonionic wetting agent, and total nitrogen content of 0.5 %. Provide one of the following: a. Loamex b. Organo Forest Humus 3. Gypsum: Gypsum shall be a commercially packed gypsum with the active ingredient calcium sulfate at 95% by volume. 4. Soil Activator Shall be an all purpose soil conditioner/fertilizer delivered to the project site in unopened original container or package, each bearing the manufacturer's statement of guaranteed analysis, and shall contain the following minimum available percentage by weight of plant nutrients: Nitrogen 5% Phosphoric Acid 3% Potash 1% Humus 50% HumicAcid 15% Soil strain bacteria — Micronutrients — Wetting agent — Soil Activator shall be "Gro-Power Plus" 5. Fertilizer Tablets: Shall be 7 gram planting tablets consisting of the following percentages by weight: Nitrogen 12% Phosphoric Acid 8% Potash 8% Humus 20% Humic Acid 4% Carlsbad City Library Learning Center EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 4 Fertilizer Tablets shall be "Gro-Power Planting Tablets" Post-Planting Fertilizer: Organic base, long-lasting, non-burning, slow release, uniform in composition, free-flowing, suitable for application with approved equipment, with trace minerals of 3% iron (expressed metallic) and 5% sulfur (elemental), in the following composition, by weight: 1. Nitrogen: 14 percent minimum. 2. Phosphoric Acid: 7 percent minimum. 3. Potash: 3 percent minimum. 2.05 HERBICIDES A. Pre-emergent herbicide: Provide one of the following: 1. Surflan 2. Treflan 3. Dymid 2.06 MULCHES A. Organic Mulch: Organic mulch, free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of the following: 1. Type: Walk-on bark, screened, 3/4 to 1-1/2 inch size. 2.07 STAKES AND GUYS A. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new hardwood, redwood, or pressure- preservative-treated softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 by 2 inches by length indicated, pointed at one end. B. Tree ties: Black color; V.I.T., Cinch Tie or equal. 2.08 ROOT CONTROL BARRIERS A. Provide sheet-type root barriers according to plan locations. Root barriers shall be 24" high, one piece, void of hinge-type sections and with connections made by solvent-welded couplings. Material shall be a minimum of 0.60" thick with %" vertical ribs at 6" on center and be made of at least 50% post-consumer high-impact polystyrene with rubberizer and UV inhibitors. Equal to: Shawtown Root Barrier Material SM-2420 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive landscaping for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting performance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 5 A. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas per plans for multiple plantings. Stake tree locations, outline shrub areas, and secure Architect's acceptance before the start of planting work. Make adjustments as required by the Architect. 3.03 PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION A. Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones over 1" in diameter, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials. B. Mix soil amendments and fertilizers to prepare topsoil at rates specified in paragraph 2.4. C. For planting backfill, mix planting soil at the following rate for all plants before backfilling: 1. Soil Conditioner 9 cu. ft./cu. yd. 2. Soil Activator 15 Ibs./cu. yd. 3. Gypsum 20 Ibs./cu. yd. 3.04 GROUND COVER AND PLANT BED PREPARATION A. Loosen subgrade of planting bed areas less than 2:1 in slope to a minimum depth of 6 inches. Remove stones larger than 1" in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous materials. B. Spread soil amendments evenly over planting areas at the specified rates and rototill to a minimum depth of 8 inches in alternating directions. 3.05 DEEP WATER LEACHING A. Perform deep water leaching after completion of irrigation system. All amended planting areas shall be deep water leached and compacted and settled by intermittent (to avoid runoff) application of irrigation water, until soil has received 2 inches of water. Perform leaching before application of post-plant fertilizer. 3.06 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to assist drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom and sides of excavation. B. Fill excavations with water and allow water to percolate out before positioning trees and shrubs. 3.07 PLANTING TREES AND SHRUBS A. Install root barriers where indicated and per detailed drawings. B. Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of ball raised above adjacent finish grades as indicated on the detailed drawings. 1. Carefully remove containers so as not to damage root balls or trunks, holding one hand over top of root ball and removing container upward with other hand. DO NOT PICK UP PLANTS BY THEIR FOLIAGE OR TRUNKS. PICK UP CONTAINER ONLY. 2. Place stock on setting layer of compacted planting soil as required to attain required planting height (crown of plant must be 1" above surrounding soil surface. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 6 3. Place backfill around ball in layers, tamping to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. Insert the specified planting tablets into soil. Form watering basins (except in lawn areas) and water all plants thoroughly immediately after planting. Remove watering basins before the end of the maintenance period. 3.08 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING A. Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs only when directed by the Architect and according to standard horticultural practice. 3.09 TREE AND SHRUB GUYING AND STAKING A. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees as indicated. Use stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend at least 72 inches above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating balls or root masses. Support trees with tie wire encased in hose sections at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. 3.10 PLANTING GROUND COVER A. Space ground cover plants as indicated. B. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots, and backfill with planting soil. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. 3.11 HERBICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply pre-emergence herbicide to groundcover areas only, and in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Do not apply to lawn areas. 3.12 MULCHING A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of pits, trenches, non-lawn planted areas under 2:1 in slope, and other areas indicated on plans. B. Organic Mulch: Apply the following average thickness of organic mulch and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against trunks or stems. 1. Thickness: 2 inches. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Observations: Notify Architect at least 3 days in advance of being ready for observation of the following: 1. Layout of planting areas. 2. Incorporation of soil amendments and fertilizer into the soil. 3. Upon completion of grading, but before planting. 4. Plant material review. 5. At completion of all planting. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 7 6. At completion of maintenance period. 3.14 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During landscaping, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect landscaping from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed. 3.15 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 8 SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. B. Openings for other work. C. Form accessories. D. Form stripping. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2003. D. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004. E. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 1995. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 347R, ACI 301, and ACI 318. 1. Maintain one copy of standards on project site. B. Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of concrete formwork and licensed in Carlsbad, California. C. Qualifications: The Contractor to be contracted for this work must specialize in architectural finish exposed cast-in-place concrete. The subcontractor shall have a minimum of ten years experience in specialty finish concrete experience. Contractor shall additionally have at least five finished structural and architectural exposed cast-in-place concrete projects complete within the last ten years within San Diego County, California. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 03100 -1 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for design, fabrication, erection and removal of formwork. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver void forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging. B. Store void forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Plywood: Douglas Fir species; solid one side grade; sound undamaged sheets with clean, true edges. B. Softwood Lumber form boards: Resawn Douglas Fir, No. 2. 1. Size: 4x and 6x nominal, 1/4" thick or greater. a. Width: 4x and 6x nominal. b. Thickness: 1/4" or greater. c. Length: 8'-0" minimum, 12'-0" maximum. 2. Gap Between Boards: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch. 3. Stapled to 3/4" plywood backform. 2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete. C. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. D. Flashing Reglets: longest possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. Provide Type B Cushion loco Reglets (with suffix 1-5 as needed per drawings) manufactured by Dayton Superior corp or equal. E. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. F. Waterstops: Rubber, minimum 1,750 psi tensile strength, minimum 50 degrees F to plus 175 degrees F working temperature range, 6"or 9" inch wide as shown, maximum possible lengths, ribbed profile, preformed corner sections, heat welded jointing. G. Zip Strips, dowel tubing, metal dowel caps, and chamfer strips: size and character as required. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings. 3.02 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 03100 -2 C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. D. Smooth Forms 1. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. 2. Provide fillet strips on external comers of beams, joists, and columns. E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings. F. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork. G. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. H. Formwork to be watertight, leaks are not acceptable I. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. before proceeding. 3.03 APPLICATION- FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. 3.04 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work. D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight. F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. G. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3.05 FORM CLEANING A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. 1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. 3.06 FORMWORK TOLERANCES Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 03100 -3 A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301. B. Formwork flatness to be 1/8" in 10'-0" maximum (non-cumulative) C. Camber slabs and beams in accordance with ACI 301. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 Test of Materials. B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. 3.08 FORM REMOVAL A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 03100 -4 SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floors and slabs on grade. B. Concrete foundation walls. C. Concrete reinforcement. D. Joint devices associated with concrete work. E. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including light pole bases. F. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Sidewalks, curbs and gutters. B. Section 03100 - Concrete Forms and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004. D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. E. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1999. F. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988. G. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001. H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. I. ASTM A 185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2002. J. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2004b. K. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003. L. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 2004a. M. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 20O4a. N. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2003. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -1 O. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2004a. P. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2001. Q. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2001. R. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2003. S. ASTM C 330 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2004. T. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2004. U. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2003. V. ASTM C 881/C 881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2002. W. ASTM C 1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1999. X. ASTM C 1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements. C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used. D. Samples: Submit two, 8 inch long samples of waterstops and construction joint devices. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction for concrete accessories. F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. 1. Maintain one copy of each document on site. B. Acquire cement from same source and aggregate from same source for entire project. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Comply with requirements of Section 03100. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Unfinished. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -2 B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A185, plain type. 1. Coiled Rolls. 2. Mesh Size: 6x6. C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source. C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330. D. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. E. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C 618, Class N. F. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1. G. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A - Water Reducing, Type C - Accelerating, and Type G - Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding. 2.05 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES A. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion during placement. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II acrylic non-redispersable type. C. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, minimum 6 mils thick. D. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent. 2.06 JOINT DEVICES AND MATERIALS A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-dispersible acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C 1059 Type II. B. Epoxy Bonding System: Complying with ASTM C 881/C 881M and of Type required for specific application. C. Joint Filler Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile. D. Construction Joint Devices: Integral galvanized steel; formed to tongue and groove profile, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, knockout holes spaced at 6 inches, ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -3 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. D. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3000 psi. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 4. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M, 5. Maximum Slump: 3 inches. 2.08 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. B. Coordinate placement of joint devices and embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. D. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. 2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications. E. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. F. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends. Cover with sand to depth shown on drawings; repair damaged vapor retarder before covering. 3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both directions. Splice laps with tie wire. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -4 C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. C. Notify Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. D. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. E. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. F. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. G. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. H. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to Section 07900 for finish joint sealer requirements. I. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. J. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. K. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. L. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. M. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. N. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth of slab thickness. O. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1 /4 inch or more in height. C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1 R, and as follows: 1. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile. 2. Steel trowel surfaces that will be left exposed. D. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:100 nominal. 3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -5 necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Supplemental Provisions Section 4-4.1 Test of Materials. B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed. F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C 143/C 143M. 3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. and within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc.. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. for each individual area. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -6 SECTION 03480 PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pavers for pedestrian traffic, on adjustable pedestals, over roofing or waterproofing protection. B. Truncated dome pavers for pedestrian traffic, used as detectable warning between pedestrian and vehicular areas. C. Closed riser steptreads for exterior stair application. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05510: Metal Stairs. B. Section 07513: Cold Process Built-Up Asphalt Roofing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. B. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate areas in which precast product will be used including plans and details of installation where applicable. Show pattern of layout and indicate where partial pavers will be installed. C. Samples: Submit two precast samples of each product, 3 1/2" x 3 1/2" inch in size, illustrating color, texture, thickness and finish. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate physical and chemical properties of product, and manufacturer's written instructions including preparatory work, methods, and precautions of installation. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Carlsbad City Library's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years of experience. 1.06 PRE-IINSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging, with labels intact until ready for installation. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. 1.08 WARRANTY Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES 03480 -1 A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for . 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Stepstone, Inc. 17025 South Main Street, Gardena, CA 90248; Tel: 310-327-7474 or 1-800-527-9029; Fax: 310-217-1424 B. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 PRODUCT NAME: STEPSTONE CLASSIC PEDESTAL PAVERS A. Composition and Materials: Pavers are made with 4000 psi (27,560 kPa) hardrock concrete using Type III cement. B. Size: 24"x24", 2" thickness C. Color: Coordinate color choice with Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. D. Finish: Coordinate finish choice with Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. E. Physical/Chemical Properties: 1. Paver weight per square foot is 22 Ibs for each unit. 2. Average water absorption is not greater than 10% in samples, with no individual unit greater than 12%. 3. Unit height is not more than +/- 3/16" from standard dim 4. No unit will differ more than +/- 3/16" from the approved samples. F. Fire rating: Concrete is non-combustible. Supplemental fire protection of other structural members may be required by code. 2.03 PRODUCT NAME: STEPSTONE TRUNCATED DOME PAVERS A. Composition and Materials: Pavers are made with 4000 psi (27,560 kPa) hardrock concrete using Type III cement. B. Size: 24"x24", 1 -3/4" thickness C. Color: Coordinate color choice with Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. D. Finish: Coordinate finish choice with Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. E. Physical/Chemical Properties: 1. Paver weight per square foot is 20 Ibs for 1 -3/4" thick units and 22 Ibs for 2" thick units. 2. Dome dimension is 0.2" high, 0.9" at base, 0.45" at top. Spacing between domes is 2.35" on center. 3. Average water absorption is not greater than 10% in samples, with no individual unit greater than 12%. 4. Unit height is not more than +/- 3/16" from standard dim 5. No unit will differ more than +/- 3/16" from the approved samples. F. Fire rating: Concrete is non-combustible. Supplemental fire protection of other structural members may be required by code. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES 03480 -2 2.04 PRODUCT NAME: STEPSTONE STEPTREADS A. Composition and Materials: Pavers are made with 4000 psi (27,560 kPa) hardrock concrete using Type III cement. Pavers reinforced with zinc-plated welded wire fabric. Reinforcing includes six bars of reinforcing steel in the longitudinal direction and reinforcing steel bars every 6" in the transverse direction. B. Type: Closed riser Steptreads will be used - Modern profile. C. Size: 2-1/2"x12" standard size, length 36"-48" per plan. D. Color Coordinate color choice with Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. E. Finish: Coordinate finish choice with Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. F. Limitations: Steptreads should be used only with a stringer system engineered to carry required loads and meet code requirements. G. Physical/Chemical Properties: 1. Steptread Closed-Riser weight per lineal foot is 36 Ibs. 2. Average water absorption is not greater than 10% in samples, with no individual unit greater than 12%. 3. Unit height is not more than +/- 3/16" from the approved samples. H. Fire rating: Concrete is non-combustible. Supplemental fire protection of other structural members may be required by code. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. PRODUCT NAME: STEPSTONE CLASSIC PEDESTAL PAVERS 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Classic Pedestal Pavers can be elevated with pedestal supports. 3. Sides shall be parallel, with courses straight. 4. Spaces between the pavers shall not be more than 1/4". 5. Pedestal Pavers are to be supported equally. B. PRODUCT NAME: STEPSTONE TRUNCATED DOME PAVERS 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and standard masonry practices. 2. Truncated Dome Pavers shall be mortared in. 3. Sides shall be parallel, with courses straight and level to each other. 4. Spaces between the pavers shall not be more than 1/4". 5. Pedestal Pavers are to be laid out with equal bearing and supported equally. C. PRODUCT NAME: STEPSTONE STEPTREADS 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and standard masonry practices. 2. Do not rest Closed-Riser Steptreads on the riser section. 3. Steptreads are welded to a structural steel stringer system. Stringer system to be designed, fabricated and installed by others to meet applicable building codes for stairways with precast concrete Steptreads. 3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A. If modified bituminous cap sheet roofing membrane is damaged or punctured in any way, stop work and notify Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc and City of Carlsbad immediately.. 3.03 CLEANING Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES 03480 -3 A. Clean pavers and steptreads of dirt, stains and mildew before Substantial Completion. B. Replace pavers and steptreads visibly damaged or cracked as the result of subsequent construction operations. C. Protect installed pavers and steptreads from subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES 03480 -4 SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete Block. B. Mortar and Grout. C. Reinforcement and Anchorage. D. Flashings. E. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry. B. Section 04065 - Mortar and Masonry Grout. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ASTM A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2002. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2004. E. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Ban 2003. F. ASTM C 129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2003. G. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2004. H. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2004a. I. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2004. J. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2004a. K. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2004. L. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2002. M. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 1997a. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, and mortar. C. Samples: Submit four samples of facing brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of Carlsbad City Library Learning Center UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -1 color range. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6FTMS 602, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depth of 6. 2. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C 129. a. Hollow block. b. lightweight. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample. 1. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 2. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. 3. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404. B. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Iron or chromium oxides with demonstrated stability and colorfastness. 1. Colors: As required to match Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc.'s color samples. C. Water: Clean and potable. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com. 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com. 4. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 Trade Names or Equals. B. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82 steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each exposure. C. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry Carlsbad City Library Learning Center UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -2 veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153/A 153M, Class B. 1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs that penetrate sheathing and insulation to provide positive anchorage. 2. Wire ties: triangular shape, 0.1875 inch thick. 3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 2 inches. 2.04 FLASHINGS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, soft temper; 26 gage (0.45 mm) thick; finish 2B to 2D. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; 3 inch wide x by maximum lengths available. B. Building Paper ASTM D 226, Type I ("No. 15") asphalt felt. C. Weeps: Polyethylene tubing. D. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, using the Proportion Specification. 1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: TypeS. 2. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type N. B. Grout: ASTM C 476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. C. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION 3.03 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.04 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -3 C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. D. Interlock intersections and external corners. E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. 3.05 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS A. Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through-wall flashing, and at bottom of walls. 3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE- GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. 3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY 3.08 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent masonry or turn up at least 4 inches to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction. 2. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar. B. Extend metal flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry. C. Lap end joints of flashings at least 4 inches and seal watertight with mastic or elastic sealant. 3.09 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. B. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant. C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance. D. Form expansion joint as detailed. 3.10 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 -4 SECTION 04812 GLASS UNIT MASONRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass masonry units. B. Mortar bed and pointing mortar. C. Perimeter treatment. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04065 - Mortar and Masonry Grout: Mortar for glass unit masonry. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter calking and sealant tooled joints. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. B. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2004a. C. ASTM C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for glass units and accessories. C. Samples: Submit two glass units illustrating color, design, and face pattern. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, positioning of reinforcement, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept glass units on site on pallets; inspect for damage. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4 - Control of Materials, for additional provisions. B. Supply ten of each type and size of glass unit for Carlsbad City Library's use in maintenance of project. PART 2 PRODUCTS Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GLASS UNIT MASONRY 04812 -1 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Glass Units: 1. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Product Premier Series Glass Block - ARGUS pattern: www.pittsburghcorning.com. 2. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4 - Control of Materials, for additional provisions. 2.02 GLASS UNITS A. Hollow Glass Units: Permanently seal hollow unit by heat fusing joint; factory coat unit edges to improve bond with mortar. 1. Nominal Size: 8 inch by 8 inch by 4 inch. 2. Color Clear glass. 3. Pattern and Design: Premier Series Glass Block - ARGUS pattern. 4. Insulation Value: U value of.51 BTU/sq ft/h/degree F. 5. Compressive Strength: 400-600 psi. 6. Visible Light Transmittance: 75 percent. 7. Shading Coefficient: .65. 8. Acoustic Sound Loss: 39 decibels. 2.03 MORTAR AND POINTING MATERIAL A. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Type M using the Proportion specification as specified in Section 04065. B. Stain Resistant Pointing Mortar: One part Portland cement, 1/8 part hydrated lime, and two parts graded (80 mesh) aggregate, proportioned by volume. Add aluminum tristearate, calcium stearate, or ammonium stearate equal to 2 percent of Portland cement by weight. 2.04 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C 270 in quantities needed for immediate use. B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. D. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. E. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. 2.05 MIX TESTS A. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C 780 for compressive strength, consistency, mortar aggregate ratio, water content, air content, and splitting tensile strength. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean glass units of substances that may impair bond with mortar or sealant. B. Establish and protect lines, levels, and coursing. C. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage and disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GLASS UNIT MASONRY 04812 -2 A. Erect glass units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Locate and secure perimeter metal channel. C. Coat sill under units with asphalt emulsion as a bond breaker, and allow to dry. D. Provide full mortar joints. Furrowing is not permitted. Remove excess mortar. E. Maintain uniform joint width of 1/4 inch. F. Isolate panel from adjacent construction on sides and top with expansion strips concealed within perimeter trim. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar. G. To accommodate pointing mortar, rake out joints 5/8 to 3/4 inch. H. Fill joints with pointing mortar. Pack into voids. Neatly tool surface to a concave profile. I. Remove excess mortar. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Variation From Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch and minus 0 inches. B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. C. Maximum Variation of Panel from Plane: 1/8 inch. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean and polish faces of glass unit masonry, using materials and technique that will not scratch or deface units. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners. Provide protection without damaging completed work. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GLASS UNIT MASONRY 04812 -3 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURALSTEEL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members, support members. B. Grouting under base plates. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AISC (AMAN) - ASD Manual of Steel Construction; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 1989, Ninth Edition. B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 2005. C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; 2004. D. AISC S334L - Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.; 1994. E. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. F. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2004a. G. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2003. H. ASTM A153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2004. I. ASTM A 242/A 242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel; 2004. J. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2004. K. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2004b. L. ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2004b. M. ASTM A 490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat-Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2004a. N. ASTM A 490M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints (Metric); 2004a. O. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2003a. P. ASTM A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2001. Q. ASTM A 514/A 514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding; 2000a. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -1 R. ASTM A 529/A 529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality; 2005. S. ASTM A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2004a. T. ASTM A 563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric); 2004. U. ASTM A 570/A 570M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality; 1998. V. ASTM A 572/A 572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel; 2004. W. ASTM A 992/A 992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2004a. X. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability; 2004b. Y. ASTM A 1011 /A 1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability; 2004a. Z. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2002. AA. ASTM F 436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers; 2004. AB. ASTM F 959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners; 2005. AC. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 1998. AD. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2004 and errata. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Connections not detailed. 3. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test analysis. E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "ASD Manual of Steel Construction". B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years Carlsbad City Library Learning Center STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -2 of documented experience. D. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years of documented experience. E. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of Orion Structural Engineering. 12257 Old Pomerado Road, Suite A, Poway, CA 92064; tel: 858-679-1974 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A 992/A 992M. C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. D. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 242/A 242M high-strength, corrosion-resistant structural steel. E. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 529/A 529M high-strength, carbon-manganese structural steel, Grade 50. F. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345) high-strength, columbium-vanadium steel. G. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade A. H. Hot-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 501, seamless. I. Steel Plate: ASTM A514/A SUM. J. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Designation SS, Grade 30 hot-rolled, or ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation SS, Grade 30 cold-rolled. K. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Finish black. L. Shear Stud Connectors:. Made from ASTM A108 Grade 1015 bars. M. Sag Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. N. Carbon Steel Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A galvanized to ASTM A153/A 153M, Class C. O. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, medium carbon, plain. P. High-Strength Structural Bolts: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), with matching ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) nuts and ASTM F 436 washers; Type 1 alloy steel. Q. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade C. R. High-Strength Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 325, Type 1 medium carbon, plain. S. Load Indicator Washers: Provide washers complying with ASTM F 959 at all connections requiring high-strength bolts. T. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. U. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C 1107 and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. V. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -3 W. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. B. Space shear stud connectors as indicated on drawings. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. D. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. 2.03 FINISH A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 7. B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Welded Connections: All shop welding to be performed by I.C.B.O. approved shop. Testing to be in compliance with I.C.B.O. approval. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may properly proceed. 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc.. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. F. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 Test of Materials. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -4 END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 -5 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. B. Section 05510-MetalStairs. C. Section 05520 - Handrails and Railings. D. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998. B. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. C. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2004a. D. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. E. ASTM A 283/A 283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2003. F. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2004b. G. ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2004b. H. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2003a. I. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004. J. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2004. K. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2004a. L. ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2004. M. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2004 and errata. N. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2000). O. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -1 P. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS-STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A 283. D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with and not to exceed maximum VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction (State of CA). 2.02 MATERIALS - ALUMINUM A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 5052 alloy, H32 or H22 temper. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel. D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.04 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings and Wall Openings: Channel sections; prime paint Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -2 finish. B. Elevator Hoistway Divider Beams: Beam sections; prime paint finish. C. Toilet Partition Suspension Members: Steel channel sections; prime paint finish. 2.05 FINISHES - STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry and items specified for galvanized finish. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: Two coats. E. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Hot Dip Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A 123M requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. F. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Hot Dip Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements. 2.06 FINISHES - ALUMINUM A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I color anodized. B. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized. C. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. D. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick; medium bronze. 2.07 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -3 completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -4 SECTION 05510 METAL STAIRS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel stair framing and supports. B. Shop cast concrete stair treads. C. Handrails at walls. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal anchors in concrete. B. Section 03480 - Precast Concrete Specialties: Precast concrete steptreads. C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. D. Section 05520 - Handrails and Railings: Metal handrails and balusters other than specified in this section. E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. B. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe. Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2004a. C. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2004. E. ASTM A 283/A 283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2003. F. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2004. G. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2004b. H. ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2004b. I. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2003a. J. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2004a. K. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 1998. L. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2004 and errata. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL STAIRS 05510 -1 M. NAAMM AMP 510 - Metal Stairs Manual; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1992, Fifth Edition. N. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2000). O. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002. P. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings; 1982 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design and fabricate stair assembly to support a uniform live load of 100 Ib/sq ft and a concentrated load of 300 Ib with deflection of stringer or landing framing not to exceed 1/180 of span. B. Fabricate metal stairs to comply with NAAMM AMP 510, Class Commercial. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Welders' Certificates: Show certification of welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. C. Steel Plates: ASTM A 283. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230 with G40/Z120 coating. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of stair structure. G. Welding Materials: AWS 01.1; type required for materials being welded. H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION-GENERAL A. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL STAIRS 05510 -2 D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. G. Fabricate components accurately for anchorage to each other and to building structure. 2.03 FINISHING A. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP 2. B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. C. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. D. Prime paint items with one coat. E. Galvanizing: Galvanize items indicated to minimum requirements of ASTM A 123/A 123M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete with setting templates. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide anchors, plates, angles, hangers, and struts required for connecting stairs to structure. C. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D. Field weld components indicated on drawings. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Field bolt and weld to match shop bolting and welding. Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. F. Mechanically fasten joints butted tight, flush, and hairline. Grind welds smooth and flush. G. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or creating adjustments not scheduled. H. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL STAIRS 05510 -3 SECTION 05511 ALUMINUM LADDERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fixed aluminum wall ladders. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Catwalks and fire escapes. 1.03 REFERENCES A. 29 CFR 1910.27 - Fixed ladders; Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. B. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders - Fixed ~ Safety Requirements; 2002. C. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004. D. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric); 2004. E. ASTM B 210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes; 2004. F. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2004a. G. ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire. Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2004. H. ASTM B 308/B 308M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy T6061-T6 Standard Structural; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings showing complete dimensions, mounting attachments, and fabrication details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the engineering and manufacturing of metal ladders, with not less than fifty years of experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance. B. Provide manufacturer's standard limited five-year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ALUMIN UM LADDERS 05511 -1 A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Alaco Ladder Company; 5167 G Street, Chino, CA 91710-5143. ASD. Tel: 888-310-7040. Fax: 909-591-7565. Email: sales@alacoladder.com. www.alacoladder.com. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum Profiles: ASTM B 221/B 221M, ASTM B 210, ASTM B 308/B 308M; Alloy 6061-T6; standard mill finish. B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209/B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6; standard mill finish. C. Fasteners: Solid aluminum aircraft rivets rated at 300 Ib shear strength. D. Fittings, Connectors, and Rung Ends: Cast aluminum alloy 356. 2.03 LADDERS A. Ladders - General: Comply with ANSI A14.3 and OSHA regulations. B. Vertical Fixed Wall Ladders: 20-1/4 inches wide; extruded aluminum serrated rungs 1-1/8 inches in diameter, connected to 2-7/8 inch aluminum side rail channels with cast aluminum rung connectors, each secured to rails by means of four solid aircraft rivets; mounting brackets 3/8 inch thick at maximum spacing of 72 inches center to center. 1. Walk-Through and Parapet Railings: Aluminum extrusions extend not less than 42 inches above landing; 24 inches between side rails at step through. 2.04 FINISHES A. Factory finish all aluminum surfaces with manufacturer's standard powder coating system. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings, and in compliance with ANSI A14.3 and OSHA regulations. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ALUMINUM LADDERS 05511 -2 SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall mounted handrails. B. Stair railings and guardrails. C. Balcony railings and guardrails. 0. Steel pipe handrails, balusters, and fittings. E. Steel tube handrails, balusters, and fittings. F. Aluminum tube handrails, balusters, and fittings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete. B. Section 05510 - Metal Stairs: Attachment plates for handrails specified in this section. C. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Wood handrail. D. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass baluster infill. E. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Placement of backing plates in stud wall construction. F. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; The Aluminum Association, Inc.; 2003. B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998. C. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2004a. D. ASTM A123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. E. ASTM B 211 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire; 2003. F. ASTM B 211M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire (Metric); 2003. G. ASTM B 241/B 241M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube; 2002. H. ASTM B 429 - 1. ASTM B 483/B 483M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Tubes and Pipe for General Purpose Applications; 2003. J. ASTM E 935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05520 -1 K. ASTM E 985 - Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 200 Ibs at any point without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. C. Samples: Submit two, 6 inch long samples of handrail. Submit two samples of elbow, wall bracket, and end stop. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E 985 and applicable local code. B. Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 75 Ibs at any point without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935. C. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members. D. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights. E. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners. 1. For anchorage to stud walls, provide backing plates, for bolting anchors. F. Provide welding fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets. 2.02 ALUMINUM MATERIALS A. Aluminum Pipe: Schedule 40; ASTM B 429, ASTM B 241/B 241M, or ASTM B 483/B 483M. B. Aluminum Tube: Minimum wall thickness of 0.127 inch; ASTM B 429, ASTM B 241/B 241 M, or ASTM B 483/B 483M. C. Rails: 1-1/2 inch diameter, extruded tubing conforming to ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M). D. Solid Bars and Flats: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211 M). E. Welding Fittings: No exposed fasteners; machined aluminum. F. Mounting: Brackets and flanges, with aluminum inserts for casting in concrete. G. Straight Splice Connectors: Welding collars; machined aluminum. H. Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to Carlsbad City Library Learning Center HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05520 -2 building structure. B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation. D. Welded Joints: E. Provide anchors and plates required for connecting railings to structure. F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Provide flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. G. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. H. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion. I. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. J. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. K. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure. L. Coordinate installation of wood handrail with Section 06200. 2.04 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Comply with AA DAF-45 for aluminum finishes required. B. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. Color: Medium Bronze. C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. D. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, for installation as work of other sections. C. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05520 -3 C. Anchor railings securely to structure. D. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Interior Stair: Tropical Hardwood rail, see Section 06200. B. Two (2) Exterior Stairs: Aluminum pipe railings, finish per 2.04 - Aluminum Finishes section above. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 05520 -4 SECTION 06067 PLASTIC AND METAL SURFACING MATERIALS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Standard Decorative Laminates. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. B. Section 06410 -CustomCabinets. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics; 1997. B. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 1999. C. ASTM D 648 - Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position; 1998c. D. ASTM D 696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30 degrees C and 30 degrees C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer; 1998. E. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials; 1999. F. ASTM D 2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor; 1995. G. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1999. H. ASTM E 162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using A Radiant Heat Energy Source; 1998. I. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 1996. J. ASTM G 22 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria; 1976 (Reapproved 1996). K. NEMA LD 3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1995. L. WIC (MAN) - Manual of Millwork; Woodwork Institute of California; 1998. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Selection Samples: Submit actual samples of surfacing materials to illustrate full range of colors, patterns, and finishes available. B. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, each 12 inches square, illustrating each selected surfacing material in specified color, pattern, and finish. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Printed installation instructions for each product. 1. Submit Manufacturer's Safety Data Sheets (M.S.D.S.) for each adhesive. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PLASTIC AND METAL SURFACING MATERIALS 06067 -1 A. Store surfacing materials to prevent breakage and marring of surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Wilsonart International; 2400 Wilson Place, P. O. Box 6110, Temple, TX 76503-6110; Tel: (254) 207- 7000, Fax: (254) 207-2384, response line (800) 433-3222. email: smartline@wilsonart.com, website: www.wilsonart.com B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Formica Corporation; 10155 Reading Road, Cincinnati, OH 45241-5279; Tel: (800) FORMICA or (513) 786-3048, Fax: (513) 786-3195. C. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4-1.6 Trade Names and Equals. 2.02 STANDARD DECORATIVE LAMINATES A. Acceptable Product: Wilsonart Laminate. B. Acceptable Product: Formica Brand Laminate. C. Product Description: Decorative surface papers, impregnated with melamine resins, bonded under heat and pressure to kraft papers impregnated with phenolic resins. D. Standard Decorative Laminate - General Purpose Type: Wilsonart Type 107 or Formica Grade 10 General Purpose Grade, having the following physical characteristics: 1. Sheet Thickness: 0.048 inch plus/minus 0.005 inch. 2. Exceeding performance requirements of NEMA LD 3-1995 Grade HGS. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 50, smoke developed index of 30, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, unbonded. 4. Pattern and Finish: Selected from manufacturer's full range of available selections. E. Location: as indicated on drawings. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Adhesives: Provide types as specified in manufacturer's printed installation instructions. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface preparation: Precondition surfacing materials and surfaces to receive surfacing materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and requirements of Sections 06410. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PLASTIC AND METAL SURFACING MATERIALS 06067 -2 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural floor, wall, and roof framing. B. Built-up structural beams and columns. C. Floor, wall, and roof sheathing. D. Preservative treatment of wood. E. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. F. Telephone and electrical panel boards. G. Wood nailers and curbs for roofing and items installed on roof. H. Roofing cant strips. I. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, and wood trim. J. Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Prefabricated beams and columns for support of wood framing. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support angles for wood framing. C. Section 06150 - Wood Decking. D. Section 06171 - Wood Chord Metal Joists. E. Section 06176 - Wood l-Joists. F. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill flashings. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AFPA T10 - Wood Frame Construction Manual; American Forest and Paper Association; 2001. B. ASTM A153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2004. C. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2004a D. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2004. E. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. F. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2002. G. AWPA C9 - Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2003. H. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber- Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -1 Wood-Preservers' Association; 2002. I. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2005. J. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 1995. K. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck framing system, bearing details, and framed openings. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: Any agency with rules approved by American Lumber Standards Committee. B. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dryorMC19. C. Stud Framing (2x2 through 2x6): 1. Grade: No. 2. D. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2x6 through 4x16): 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch. 2. Grade: No. 1 & Btr.. E. Miscellaneous Blocking, Furring, and Nailers: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subfloor/Underlayment Combination: APA Rated Sturd-l-Floor. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -2 1. Exposure Class: Exterior. 2. Span Rating: 24 inches. B. Subflooring: APA Rated Sheathing. 1. Exposure Class: Exterior. 2. Span Rating: 48/24 inches. 3. Thickness: 3/4 inch, nominal. C. Other Applications: 1. Concealed Plywood: PS 1, C-C Plugged, exterior grade. 2. Exposed Plywood: PS 1, A-D, interior grade. 3. Electrical Component Mounting: APA rated sheathing, fire retardant treated. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing. B. Subfloor Glue: Waterproof, water base, air cure type, cartridge dispensed. 2.05 FACTORYWOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. B. Preservative Treatment: C. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft retention. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 3. Treat lumber in contact with concrete. 4. Treat lumber less than 18 inches above grade, a. Treat lumber in other locations as indicated. 5. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC2 and UC3B, Commodity Specification F (Treatment C9) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft retention. a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat plywood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. c. Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete. d. Treat plywood less than 18 inches above grade. e. Treat plywood in other locations as indicated. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. If black mold is encountered, treat areas containing mold. Remove all mold or replace all members. Treatment can consist of: 1. 5 to 1 water/bleach solution. 2. tri-sodium phosphate solution. 3. As recommended by mold hazard professional. B. Members shall not be enclosed with any other materials if mold problem persists, or if moisture Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -3 content of wood products exceeds AWPA allowable limits. 3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. D. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. E. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. F. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction Manual. G. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing at each end. H. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed. I. Provide bridging at joists in excess of 8 feet span as detailed. Fit solid blocking at ends of members. J. Frame openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs. K. Provide miscellaneous members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. L. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD A. Place full width continuous sill flashings under framed walls on cementitious foundations. Lap flashing joints 4 inches and seal. B. Place sill gasket directly on sill flashing. Puncture gasket cleanly and fit tightly to protruding foundation anchor bolts. C. Coordinate installation of wood decking, wood chord metal joists, and plywood web joists. D. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. E. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings, roofing vapor retardant, and parapet construction. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subflooring/Underlayment Combination: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Subflooring: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted. C. Underlayment: Secure to subflooring with nails and glue. 1. At locations where resilient flooring will be installed, fill and sand splits, gaps, and rough areas. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -4 2. Place building paper between floor underpayment and subflooring. D. Seal all cut and exposed edges of sheathing prior to installation. E. Install plywood perpendicular to framing members. F. Engage plywood tongue and groove edges. G. Allow expansion space at edges and ends H. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered and sheet ends over firm bearing. 1. Use sheathing clips between roof framing members. 2. Provide solid edge blocking between sheets. 3. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted. I. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails or screws. 1. Use plywood or other acceptable structural panels at building corners, for not less than 48 inches, measured horizontally. 2. Place building paper horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and ends. 3.05 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. C. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. 3.07 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Supplemental Provisions Section 7-8 - Project Site Maintenance. 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not bum scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or "waste-to-energy" facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -5 SECTION 06150 WOOD DECKING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plywood structural wood decking. B. Fire retardant treatment of wood. C. Preservative treatment of wood. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Bearing support. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AITC A190.1 - American National Standard for Wood Products - Structural Glued Laminated Timber; American Institute of Timber Construction; 2002. B. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 1999. C. ASTM D 2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing; 1994 (Reapproved 2004). D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. E. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2002. F. AWPA C9 - Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2003. G. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood Preservers' Association; 2002. H. AWPA C27 - Plywood — Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2002. I. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2005. J. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 1995. K. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. L. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002. M. WCLB (GR) - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17; West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; 1996, Suppl. VII (1996) & VIII (1997). N. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2005. O. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Live Loads: See structural drawings. With deflection limited to total load: 1/240, live Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WOOD DECKING 06150 -1 load: 1/360 for non-brittle finishes. B. Design Roof Live Loads: See structural drawings. With deflection limited to total load: 1/240, live load : 1/360 for non-brittle finishes. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck framing system, bearing details, and framed openings. D. Samples of Wood Deck Exposed To View: Submit two full size samples, illustrating wood grain, stain, and finish. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following: 1. Lumber: PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 2. Lumber Inspection Agencies: WCLB. 3. Construction Panels: a. PS 1 for veneer plywood. B. Perform Work in accordance with AITC A190.1. 1. Maintain one copy of document on site. C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. D. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. E. Design decking under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in Carlsbad, California. F. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. G. Pressure Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect glue laminated members in accordance with AITC 111 requirements for bundle wrapped and individually wrapped material. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Plywood Decking: 1. Georgia-Pacific Corporation: www.gp.com. 2. Louisiana-Pacific Corp: www.lpcorp.com. 3. SierraPine Limited (Medite). Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WOOD DECKING 06150 -2 4. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Lumber Grading Rules: WCLB (GR). C. Lumber Decking: 19 percent maximum moisture content; double tongue. D. Plywood Decking: PS 1 veneer plywood; APA Rated Sheathing, Span Rating 24/48; Exposure Durability 1; A interior veneer appearance grade; sanded. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized steel. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of decking. 3. Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. B. Adhesive: Waterproof, air cure type, cartridge dispensed. C. Sealer: WE-TR-V, see section 09900. 2.04 WOOD TREATMENT A. Factory-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Manufacturers: a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc: www.wolmanizedwood.com. 2. Exterior Type: AWPA Use Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H (Treatment C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood), chemically treated and pressure impregnated; with maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 and with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D 2898. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. 3. Interior Type A: AWPA Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H (Treatment C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood), low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 and with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Do not use Type A treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet. C. Preservative Pressure Treatment: D. Surface-Applied Wood Preservative: E. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA C2 using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft retention. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WOOD DECKING 06150 -3 A. Verify that support framing is ready to receive decking. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of support items. 3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials and roofing and related metal flashings. Treat site-sawn cuts. C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.04 INSTALLATION - PANEL DECKING A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered over firm bearing. On sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongue upward. B. Engage plywood tongue and groove edges. C. Allow expansion space at edges and ends. D. Attach decking with method as described in structural drawings. E. Use sheathing clips at unsupported edges of plywood between supporting framing members. F. Cut decking to accommodate roof drain and flange. 3.05 INSTALLATION-BOARD DECKING A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered over firm bearing. On sloped surfaces, lay decking with tongue upward. B. Fit butt end deck joints occurring between support members with metal splines to maintain tight, aligned joints. C. Engage decking tongue and groove edges. D. Secure with fasteners. Side spike planks together, through pre-drilled holes. E. Maintain decking joint space of 1/16 inch maximum. F. Cut decking to accommodate roof drain and flange. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Surface Flatness of Decking Without Load: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WOOD DECKING 06150 -4 SECTION 06162 ACOUSTICAL FLOORING SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sound-deadening acoustical flooring systems.. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 6150: Wood Decking. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84 - Test method for surface burning characteristics of building materials. B. ASTM D 1037 - Test methods of evaluating properties of wood-base fiber and particle panel materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacuter's catalog data, detail sheets and specifications. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 7x10 inch in size. D. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate written installation instructions. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Carlsbad City Library's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than ten years of documented experience in producing sound-deadening board of the type specified herein. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original packaging. B. Inspect the materials upon delivery to assure that specified products have been received. C. Report damaged material immediately to the delivering carrier and note such damage on the carrier's freight bill of lading. D. Store materials in a dry place, indoors, or on raised platform protected from weather damage. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Homasote Company: P.O. Box 7240, West Trenton, NJ 08628-0240 Tel: 800-257-9491 www.homasote.com B. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4 - Control of Materials. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ACOUSTICAL FLOORING SYSTEM 06162 -1 C. Provide all sound-deadening boards from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS 2.03 PRODUCT 1 A. Sound-deadening boards: Homasote 440 SoundBarrien physical properties as follows: 1. Density: 26-28 pcf 2. Tensile Strength: 450-700 psi 3. Hardness: (Janka Ball): 230 Ibs. 4. Water absorption by volume; ASTM D 1037: a. 2 hour immersion: 5 percent maximum. b. 24 hour immersion: 15 percent maximum. 5. Expansion: 50 to 90 percent relative humidity: 0.25 percent 6. R-value: 3.4 inch = 1.4 7. Flame Spread: Class III (or C) 8. Noise reduction coefficient: 0.20 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: APAAFG-01 approved. B. Angular thread nails: length as required to penetrate a minimum of 3/4 inch into sub-floor. C. Screws: course thread drywalltype wood screw, length as required to penetrate 3/4 inch into sub-floor. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed. B. Verify framing member spacing complies with manufacturer's requirements depending on substrates and installation methods. C. Verify envirionmental conditions are, and will continue to be, maintained in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. D. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates or conditions. E. Starting work by installer is acceptance of substrates and environmental conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Follow manufacturer's instructions by separating and allowing Homasote 440 SoundBarrier to be exposed to environmental temperature and humidity conditions for not less than 24 hours before start of installation. B. 440 SoundBarrier panel must be installed in a clean, dry condition. DO NOT INSTALL WET PANELS. It is essential to make every effort to prevent water from ponding on installed panels. 440 SoundBarrier panels must be thoroughly dry prior to closing in the structure. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for cutting and installation of Homasote 440 SoundBarrier. B. Over wood sub-floors: 1. Apply 4 by 8 foot panels on approved sub-flooring. 2. Using all approved APA sub-floor adhesive meeting APA-AFG-01 specifications, apply a Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ACOUSTICAL FLOORING SYSTEM 06162 -2 3/8 inch bead of adhesive. Holding back 3/4 inch from panel edges and in an 'X' pattern withing the field, apply adhesive as shown in manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Allow 3/16 inch space at panel joints, and 3/8 inch space along walls and partitions. 4. Use proper length ring shank nails or screws to penetrate sub-floor material 3/4 inch minimum. Follow nailing pattern illustrated in manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Hold back nails or screws 3/8 inch from panel edges. 3.04 CLEANING A. Replace panel that cannot be repaired. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ACOUSTICAL FLOORING SYSTEM 06162 -3 SECTION 06171 WOOD CHORD METAL JOISTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood chord metal joists for roof and floor framing. B. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage. C. Framing for openings. D. Fire retardant treatment of wood. E. Preservative treatment of wood. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. B. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2002. C. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2002. D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2005. E. SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002. F. WCLB (GR) - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17; West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; 1996, Suppl. VII (1996) & VIII (1997). G. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2005. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Floor Loads: See structural drawings, with deflection limited to 1/240 and 1/360 for live loads. B. Design Roof Loads: See structural drawings, with deflection limited to 1/240 for dead loads and 1/360 for live loads. C. Maximum Truss Depth: See structural drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide joist configurations, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of joists, loads and joist cambers, required openings for web penetrations, framed openings. Submit design calculations. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WOOD CHORD METAL JOISTS 06171 -1 A. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by American Lumber Standards Committee. 1. Maintain one copy of each document on site. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience. C. Design joists under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this product type and licensed in Carlsbad, California. D. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. E. Pressure Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to I.B.C. 2000 and 1997 U.B.C. for seismic loads code for loads, seismic zoning, other governing load criteria. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect joists from warping or other distortion by stacking in vertical position, braced to resist movement. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Chord Metal Joists: 1. MiTek Industries, Inc: www.mii.com. 2. Trus Joist/Weyerhaeuser: www.trusjoist.com. 3. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Lumber: 1. Moisture Content: Between 7 and 9 percent. 2. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Lumber Grading Rules: WCLB (GR). C. Wood Chord Members: Single and double top and bottom chord as called out in plan, 19 percent maximum moisture content. Finger scarfing permitted unless otherwise noted by joist manufacturer. D. Web Members: Cold rolled steel tubing, hot-dip galvanized, minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi, accurately die stamped, electrically welded. E. Connecting Pins: Hot-dip galvanized structural carbon steel. F. Joist Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by joist manufacturer. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Wood Blocking: In accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel, type to suit application. C. Bearing Plates: Hot-dip galvanized steel, unfinished. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WOOD CHORD METAL JOISTS 06171 -2 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate joists to achieve structural requirements indicated. 2.05 WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire Retardant Treatment, Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H (Treatment C20), chemically treated and pressure impregnated, maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84; kiln dried after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. B. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 Ib/cu ft retention. 1. Kiln dry after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. C. Surface-Applied Wood Preservative: D. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): water borne preservative. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive joists. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 ERECTION A. Install joists in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. C. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc.. E. Place permanent bridging and bracing. F. Place headers and supports to frame openings required. G. Frame openings between joists with lumber in accordance with Section 06100. H. Coordinate placement of decking with work of this Section. I. After erection, touch-up galvanized surfaces with zinc primer. 3.04 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with roofing and related metal flashings. Treat site-sawn cuts. C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch maximum, from true position. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WOOD CHORD METAL JOISTS 06171 -3 SECTION 06176 WOOD I-JOISTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood l-joists for roof and floor framing. B. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage. C. Framing for openings. D. Preservative treatment of wood. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 2559 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions; 2004. B. ASTM D 5055 - Standard Specification for Establishing and Monitoring Structural Capacities of Prefabricated Wood l-Joists; 2004. C. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; 1995. D. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature describing materials, dimensions, allowable spans and spacings, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing requirements, and installation instructions; identify independent inspection agency. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes and spacing of joists, bracing and bridging, bearing stiffeners, holes to be cut (if any), and framed openings between joists. D. Certificate: Certification by joist manufacturer that products delivered are of the same design and construction as those evaluated by the independent inspection agency. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's original packaging with manufacturer's name and product identification intact and legible. B. Protect products from damage due to weather and breakage. C. Protect joists from warping or other distortion by stacking in upright position, braced to resist movement, with air circulation under coverings and around stacks. D. Handle individual joists in the upright position. PART2 PRODUCTS Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WOOD I-JOISTS 06176 -1 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood l-Joists: 1. Georgia-Pacific Corporation: www.gp.com. 2. Louisiana-Pacific Corp: www.lpcorp.com. 3. Trus Joist/Weyerhaeuser www.trusjoist.com. 4. Subtitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Wood l-Joists: Solid lumber top and bottom flanges and oriented strand board (OSB) webs bonded together with structural adhesive, with published span rating to meet project requirements. 1. Span Rating: Established and monitored in accordance with ASTM D 5055 by independent inspection agency. 2. Oriented Strand Board: Comply with PS 2. 3. Adhesive: Tested for wet/exterior service in accordance with ASTM D 2559. 4. Fabrication Tolerances: a. Flange Width: Plus/minus 1/32 inch. b. Flange Thickness: Minus 1/16 inch. c. Joist Depth: Plus 0, minus 1/8 inch. 5. Marking: Mark each piece with depth, joist spacing, and allowable span for joist spacing. B. Wood-Based Components: 1. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. C. Joist Bridging: Type, size and spacing recommended by joist manufacturer. D. Wood Blocking: In accordance with Section 06100. E. Fasteners: Electrogalvanized steel, type to suit application. F. Bearing Plates: Hot-dip galvanized steel, unfinished. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive joists. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 ERECTION A. Install joists in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position. C. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc.. E. Place permanent bridging and bracing. F. Place headers and supports to frame openings required. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WOOD I-JOISTS 06176 -2 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. B. Tropical hardwood handrails. C. Wood casings and moldings. D. Hardware and attachment accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06410 -Custom Cabinets: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work. B. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. C. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass and glazing of wood partitions and screens. Bi-fold partition doors. D. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. 1.03 REFERENCES A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004. C. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 1999. D. ANSI 297.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2004. E. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. F. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2003. G. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2002. H. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; 2004. I. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000. J. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 1995. K. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. L. WDMA NWWDA I.S.4 - Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork; National Wood Window and Door Association; 2000. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -1 B. Product Data: 1. Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions. 2. Provide instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, accessories, to a minimum scale of 1-1/2 inch to 1 ft. D. Samples: Submit two samples of finish plywood, 8x8 inch in size illustrating wood grain and specified finish. E. Samples: Submit two samples of Ipe wood handrail and guardrail 6 inch long. F. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 6 inch long. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom grade. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect work from moisture damage. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. B. Coordinate the work with electrical rough-in and installation of associated and adjacent components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. B. Ipe tropical hardwood: Round, 1-1/2" diameter, in lengths to prevent minimum butt-joining of handrails. Used for interior stair handrails, bridge guardrail. 2.02 FASTENERS A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming, and Blocking. B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type. C. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. 2.04 WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire Retardant Treatment (FR-S Type): Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -2 of providing flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): AWPA Treatment C2 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. C. Water Repellent Preservative Treatment by Dipping Method: WDMA NWWDA I.S.4, with 0.25 percent retainage. D. Shop pressure treat wood materials requiring fire rating to concealed wood blocking. E. Provide identification on fire retardant treated material. F. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum percent moisture content. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. D. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. 2.06 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Finish work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1500: E. Finish work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Supplemental Provisions Section 7-8, System TR-2 (Transparent). F. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. 3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -3 B. Brush apply one coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials. Treat site-sawn cuts. C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.04 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth. B. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -4 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CABINETS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Cabinet hardware. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06651 - Solid Surface Fabrications: Counter-tops. B. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Site finishing of cabinet exterior. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004. B. AW1/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2003. C. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). D. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; 2004 (ANSI/HPVA HP-1). E. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2000. F. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 1995. G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. H. Wl (MAN) - Manual of Millwork; Woodwork Institute; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square, illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Premium quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene not less than one week before starting work of this section. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CUSTOM CABINETS 06410 -1 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Store materials to protect breakage and marring of surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1. Protect units from moisture damage. 2. Store materials protected from exposure to direct sunlight and other harmful weather conditions, surface contaminants, and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; Graded in accordance with WIC Custom Grade, Douglas Firm hemlock, Ponderosa pine or Sugar Pine. 2.03 PANEL MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood: NIST PS 1; Graded in accordance with WIC Manual of Millwork, core materials of veneer;. B. Hardwood Plywood: NIST PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, core materials of veneer, type of glue recommended for application. C. Bamboo Plywood: Vertical Amber Plywood 'BP-V4896A by Plyboo, or equal. 1. Material: 100% Bamboo. 2. Flame Spread: 200 or less class C in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Formaldehyde free and from an FSC certified source. 4. Core: Laminated using the hot press method with low/no VOC adhesive 5. Face veneer: Laminated to core using the cold press method with low/no VOC adhesive 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by Wl to suit application. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. D. Grommets: Standard painted metal grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface. 2.05 HARDWARE A. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using surface mounted metal shelf standards and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. B. Drawer and Door Pulls: Extruded aluminum pull, full width of drawer, satin finish. 1. Model: Hafele 126.27.306, or equal. 2. Color: Black. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CUSTOM CABINETS 06410 -2 C. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, oil rubbed bronze with satin finish. D. Catches: Magnetic. E. Drawer Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, oil rubbed bronze with satin finish. F. Drawer Slides: G. Hinges: Concealed (fully mortised) self-closing type, steel with satin finish. H. Sliding Door Track Assemblies: Upper and lower track of satin anodized aluminum, with matching shoe equipped with nylon rollers. 2.06 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Shop brush apply wood materials requiring UL fire rating to concealed wood blocking. B. Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated material. C. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting. 2.07 SITE FINISHING MATERIALS A. Stain, Polyurethane, and Finishing Materials: As specified in Section 09900. B. Finishing: Site finished as specified in Section 09900. 2.08 FABRICATION A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. B. Fit shelves and exposed edges with matching veneer edging. Use one piece for full length only. C. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick; flush style. D. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. E. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verily locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges. 2.09 FACTORY FINISHING A. Before finishing, all exposed portions of millwork shall have handling marks or effects of exposure to moisture removed with a thorough, final sanding over all surfaces of the exposed portions, using at least 150 grit or finer sandpaper, and shall be cleaned before applying sealer or finish. B. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. C. For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth. D. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. E. Seal all wood surfaces of cabinets with two coats of polyurethane. Brush apply only. F. Seal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CUSTOM CABINETS 06410 -3 A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. C. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. D. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. E. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.. B. Refinish, touch-up, or replace all installed product damaged during construction at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CUSTOM CABINETS 06410 -4 SECTION 06605 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass reinforced polyester panel system for adhesive mounting. B. Moldings, adhesive, and joint sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics; 2005. B. ASTM D 523 - Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss; 1989 (Reapproved 1999). C. ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998. D. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2003. E. ASTM D 696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30 degrees C and 30 degrees C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer; 2003. F. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials; 2003. G. ASTM D 792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement; 2000. H. ASTM D 1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes; 2002. I. ASTM D 2486 - Standard Test Methods for Scrub Resistance of Wall Paints; 2000. J. ASTM D 2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor; 1995 (Reapproved 2001). K. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. D. Maintenance Instructions. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 06605 -1 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Marlite; 202 Harger Street, Dover, OH 44622. ASD. Tel: (330) 343-6621. Fax:(330)343-7296. Email: info@marlite.com www.marlite.com B. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4-1.6 - Trade names or Equals. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Provide plastic paneling in rooms 102 and 231. 2.03 PANEL SYSTEM A. Plastic Panel System: Factory finished panels, trim, sealant, and accessories. B. Panels: Marlite FRP Panels; fiberglass reinforced polyester, USDA approved for incidental food contact. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 (Class A/I). 2. Surface Texture: Gently pebbled, high-gloss. 3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard selection. 4. Thickness: 3/32 inch, nominal. 5. Width: 48 inches. 6. Height: 96 inches. 7. Flexural Strength: 10,000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. 8. Flexural Modulus: 3,100 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 790. 9. Tensile Strength: 7,000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638. 10. Tensile Modulus: 1,600,000 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638. 11. Barcol Hardness: 35, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2583. 12. Impact Resistance: 7.2 ft-lb/in, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 256, Izod method. 13. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 0.0000157 in/in/degree F, measured in accordance with ASTM D 696. 14. Water Absorption: 0.72 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 570. 15. Specific Gravity: 1.8, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 792. C. Panel Trim: Extruded PVC, in manufacturer's standard colors. 1. Outside corners, inside corners, edge trim, and division molding. D. Sealant: Marlite Silicone Sealant; gunnable silicons rubber; clear. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Take panels out of cartons and allow to acclimatize to room conditions for at least 48 hours prior to installation. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 06605 -2 B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. D. Protect existing surfaces from damage due to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use the adhesives recommended by the panel manufacturer unless prohibited by local regulations; obtain manufacturer's approval of alternative adhesives. C. Install continuous bead of silicone sealant in each joint and trim groove and between trim and adjacent construction, maintaining 1/8 inch expansion space. D. Avoid contamination of panel faces with adhesives, solvents, or cleaners; clean as necessary and replace if not possible to repair to original condition. E. Protect installed products until completion of project. F. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 06605 -3 SECTION 06651 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid polymer washroom vanities and counter top. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Restroom counter supports. B. Section 06410 - Custom Cabinets 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. B. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005. D. UL (ECMD) - Electrical Construction Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. E. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. F. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1993 (and Revision 1,2,3,4). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, thicknesses, required clearances, tolerances, materials, colors, finishes, fabrication details, field jointing, adjacent construction, methods of support, integration of plumbing components, and anchorages. C. Product Data: Provide data on specified component products, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Samples: Submit two samples representative of vanity top, 6x6 inch in size, illustrating color, texture, and finish. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation of opening required, rough-in sizes; provide templates for cast-in or placed frames or anchors; tolerances for item placement, temporary bracing of components. F. Maintenance Data: Indicate list of approved cleaning materials and procedures required; list of substances that are harmful to the component materials. 1. Include instructions for stain removal, surface and gloss restoration. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Carlsbad City Library's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651 -1 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Sequence Work to permit installation of adjacent affected construction, plumbing rough-in. Coordinate the installation of with partition erection and plumbing work. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Special Provisions, Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide two containers of 16 oz of polishing cream. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Solid Polymer Fabrications: 1. Avonite, Inc; Product solid surfacing and shaped products. 2. DuPont; Product Corian Solid Surfaces. 3. Sform; Product balustrade panels. 4. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sform EcoResin Resin Sheet: Engineered polyester resin, Glycol modified. Thickness for use as balustrade panel as recommended in writing by manufacturer. B. DuPont Corian solid surfacing: Cast, non-porous, filled polymer, not coated, laminated or of composite construction with through body colors meeting ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI 2124.6, having minimum physical and performance properties specified. Standard thickness: 1/2". C. Avonite Surfaces: patented, non-porous homogeneous blend of polyester/acrylic alloys and fillers. Standard thickness: 1/2". D. Polishing Cream: Compatible polishing cream to achieve specified sheen to gel coat. E. Core Framing: Softwood lumber, clear and free of knots. F. Adhesive: Manufacturer-recommended type, cartridge dispensed. 2.03 FINISH A. Color: As selected by Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint preparation and affected dimensions are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide anchoring devices for installation and embedding. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651 -2 6. Align work plumb and level. C. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Dimension: 1/8 inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1/8 inch. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean and polish fabrication surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit construction near unprotected surfaces. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. Sform EcoResin Resin Sheet: use as balustrade panel at interior stair, as indicated in Drawings and Finish Plan. 6. Avonite Solid Surfaces: use at various countertops, as indicated in Drawings and Finish Plan. C. DuPont Corian Solid Surface: use at various countertops, as indicated in Drawings and Finish Plan. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 06651 -3 SECTION 07130 SHEET WATERPROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet membrane waterproofing. B. Cant strips and other accessories. C. Drainage panels and Protection boards. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02316 - Fill and Backfill. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension; 1998a (Reapproved 2002). B. ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998. C. ASTM D 624 - Standard Test Method For Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000. D. ASTM D 746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact; 2004. E. ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method For Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness; 2004. F. ASTM D 2581 - Standard Specification for Polybutylene (PB) Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials; 2002. G. ASTM D 3020 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene and Ethylene Copolymer Plastic Sheeting for Pond, Canal, and Reservoir Lining; 1989. H. ASTM D 4068 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) Sheeting for Concealed Water Containment Membrane; 2001. I. ASTM D 4551 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Flexible Concealed Water-Containment Membrane; 1996 (Reapproved 2001). J. ASTM D 4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single Ply Roof Membrane; 2004. K. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000. L. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition. M. NRCA MS108 - The NRCA Waterproofing and Dampproofmg Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Third Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other materials. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SHEET WATERPROOFING 07130 -1 D. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Carlsbad City Library's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Membrane Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in waterproofing sheet membranes with five years experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application and until liquid or mastic accessories have cured. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water, except where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure. D. For warranty repair work, remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Tremco; Product Paraseal. www. tremcosealants.com B. Protecto Wrap; Product Jiffy Seal Membrane, www. protectowrap.com C. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Sheet Waterproofing - General: Composite HPDE/bentonite membrane, mechanically attached. 1. Capable of resisting water head of 150 feet and preventing moisture migration to interior. 2. Color: Gray/Black 3. Pliability: 180° bend over 1" mandrel @ -25°F ASTM D 146 4. Tensile Strength: 4,000 psi ASTM D 412 5. Resistant to micororganisms including, but not limited to: bacteria, fungi, mold and yeast. 6. Elongation - ultimate failure of membrane: 700% ASTM D 638, Type 4 Dumbell 7. Puncture Resistance: 169 Ibs. ASTM E 154-88 8. Product: Paraseal manufactured by Tremco. www.tremcosealants.com B. Modified Bituminous Membrane: Asphalt and polymer modifiers of styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS) type, reinforced with non-woven polyester; smooth surfaced. 1. Thickness:. a. Jiffy Seal 500: 60 mils. 2. Sheet Width: 6 inch, minimum. 3. Ultimate Elongation: 1500 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SHEET WATERPROOFING 07130 -2 4. Water Absorption: 0.23 percent increase in weight, maximum, measured in accordance with ASTM D 570, water immersion. 5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.003 perm inch, measured in accordance with ASTM E 96. C. Primer: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. D. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. E. Membrane Sealant: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. F. Adhesives: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. G. Thinner and Cleaner: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with sheet membrane. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant for Substrate Surfaces: Type as specified in Section 07900 and approved by membrane manufacturer. B. Drainage Panel: 1/4 inch thick formed plastic, embossed with cover sheet. C. Cant Strips: Premolded composition material. D. Flexible Flashings: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer. E. Counterflashings: Galvanized steel sheet, 24 gauge. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. C. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Vacuum substrate clean. C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer. D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant using depth to width ratio as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION-MEMBRANE A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Roll out membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles. C. Mechanically Fastened Membrane: Install mechanical fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Overlap edges 2" minimum and ends 6" minimum. E. Overlap edges and ends and seal by method recommended by manufacturer, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently waterproof. F. Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints, whether joints Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SHEET WATERPROOFING 07130 -3 are static or dynamic. G. Weather lap joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. Seal joints and seams. H. Install flexible flashings. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible flashings. Seal watertight to membrane. I. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. 3.04 INSTALLATION- DRAINAGE PANEL and PROTECTION BOARD A. Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainage downward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. B. Place protection board directly against drainage panel; butt joints. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. C. Adhere protection board to substrate with compatible adhesive. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Carlsbad City Library will provide testing and inspection services in accordance with Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 - Test of Materials. Shall provide temporary construction and materials for testing. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. Paraseal: Foundation Wall - use one ply of membrane waterproofing; three plies at inside comers; adhesive applied. B. Jiffy Seal 500: All other typical uses including, but not limited to: at parapets, beneath stucco at windows and exterior railing attachments, roof and deck protrusions, and at drains - use as directed by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SHEET WATERPROOFING 07130 -4 SECTION 07140 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fluid applied membrane waterproofing. B. Drainage panels. 1.02 REFERENCES A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. AATCC Test Method 30 - Antifungal Activity, Assessment on Textile Materials: Mildew and Rot Resistance of Textile Materials; 2004. C. ASTM C 836 - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use With Separate Wearing Course; 2003. D. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension; 1998a (Reapproved 2002). E. ASTM D 429 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates; 2003. F. ASTM D 471 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Effect of Liquids; 1998. G. ASTM D 624 - Standard Test Method For Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000. H. ASTM D 746 - Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact; 2004. I. ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method For Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness; 2004. J. ASTM D 5385 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing Membranes; 1993 (Reapproved 2000). K. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane, surface conditioner, and joint and crack sealants. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other materials. D. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and acceptable installation temperatures. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Carlsbad City Library's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Membrane Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in waterproofing sheet membranes with five years experience. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07140 -1 B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers with manufacturers name, product identification, lot number, and mixing and installation instructions. B. Storage and Protection: Store materials to prevent deterioration and damage due to freezing, temperature change, and contamination by harmful materials. C. Store containers under cover and elevated above grade. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 50 degrees F and 5 degrees F above dewpoint for 24 hours before and during application and until cured. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water, except where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure. D. For warranty repair work, remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cold-Applied Elastomeric Manufacturers: 1. Tremco; Product TREMproof 201: www.tremcosealants.com. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4-1.6: Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Cold-Applied Elastomeric Membrane: complying with ASTM C 836, one component. Coal-tar free. 1. Cured Thickness: 60 mils, minimum. 2. Suitable for installation over masonry substrates. 3. VOC Content: Comply with local codes. 4. Tensile Strength: 200 to 300 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412. 5. Ultimate Elongation: 600 to 700 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412. 6. Hardness: 58 - 64, measured in accordance with ASTM D 2240, using Type A durometer. 7. Tear Strength: 14 kN/m, measured in accordance with ASTM D 624. 8. Water Absorption: 0.7 percent increase in weight, maximum, measured in accordance with ASTM D 471. 9. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.14 perm inch, measured in accordance with ASTM E 96. 10. Adhesion: 5 to 8 Ibf/in of width, measured in accordance with ASTM D 429. 11. Brittleness Temperature: Minus 40 degrees C, measured in accordance with ASTM D 746. 12. Product: TREMproof 201 manufactured by Tremco Inc. a. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 Trade Names or Equals. 2.03 ACCESSORIES Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07140 -2 A. Surface Conditioner Type compatible with membrane compound; and as recommended by membrane manufacturer. B. Primer: Type compatible with membrane compound; and as recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Drainage Panel: 0.22 inch thick formed plastic, hollowed sandwich; J-Drain 302 manufactured by JDR Industries Inc. 1. Core Compressive Strength: 30,000 psf. 2. Core Flow: 7 gpm/ft width, as measures in accordance with ASTM D 4716. 3. Fabric Flow: 140 gpm/ft width, as measures in accordance with ASTM D 4716. 4. Fabric Puncture Resistance: 65 Ibs, as measured in accordance with ASTM 4833. 5. Fabric Apparent Opening Size (EOS): 70 sieve. 6. Roll Width: 4 feet. D. Foundation Drain: one inch thick formed plastic, embossed with cover sheet; J-Drain SWD-6 manufactured by JDR Industries Inc. 1. Width: 6 inches. 2. Core Compressive Strength: 7,500 psf. 3. Core In-Plane Flow: 170 gpm/ft width, as measures in accordance with ASTM D 4716. 4. Fabric Flow: 150 gpm/ sq ft, as measures in accordance with ASTM D 4491. 5. Fabric Mullen Burst Strength: 185 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D 3786. 6. Fabric Puncture Resistance: 55 Ibs, as measured in accordance with ASTM 4833. 7. Fabric Apparent Opening Size (EOS): 70 sieve. 8. Roll length: 150 feet. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter, dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits, projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. C. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth, free of honeycomb or pitting, and not detrimental to full contact bond of waterproofing materials. D. Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Vacuum substrate clean. C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant using methods recommended by sealant manufacturer. E. Substrates must be clean and dry with no oils, grease or loose debris 3.03 PRECAUTIONS A. Avoid contamination with water or moisture. B. All pails and jugs are to be tightly closed until ready for use. C. All equipment, air supplies, and application substrates must be absolutely dry. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07140 -3 D. Do not apply in wet weather or when rain is imminent.orwhen materials or substrate may. become wet within 4 hours after coating. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Apply surface conditioner and/or primer at a rate, and as recommended, by manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry. B. Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry. C. At joints and cracks less than 1/2 inch in width including joints between horizontal and vertical surfaces, apply 12 inch wide strip of joint cover sheet. D. At joints from 112 to 1 inch in width, loop joint cover sheet down into joint between 1 -1 /4 and 1-3/4 inch. Extend sheet 6 inches on either side of expansion joint. E. Center joint cover sheet over joints. Roll sheet into 1/8 inch coating of waterproofing material. Apply second coat over sheet extending minimum of 6 inches beyond sheet edges. F. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to specified minimum thickness. G. Apply extra thickness of waterproofing material at corners, intersections, and angles. H. Extend waterproofing material into drain clamp flange, apply adequate coating of liquid membrane to assure clamp ring seal. Coordinate with drain installation in Section 15146. 3.05 INSTALLATION-DRAINAGE PANEL A. After membrane has cured, but before it becomes dusty, apply separation sheet. Lap joints to ensure complete coverage. B. Place foundation drain at base of wall. Bond to substrate with compatible adhesive. C. Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainage downward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions. D. Adhere drainage panel to substrate with compatible adhesive. E. Connect Foundation drain to 4" corrugated plastic drain pipe. F. Properly compact soil to prevent settling of foundation drain. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Carlsbad City Library will provide testing and inspection services in accordance with Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 - Test of Materials. Shall provide temporary construction and materials for testing. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect uncovered membrane from damage. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane. 3.08 SCHEDULE A. Retaining Wall: Vulkem 201R, drainage board and foundation drain. 1. Membrane to be applied in 30 mil coats, wait 24 hours between coats. B. Planter Wall and floor CIM 1000 and drainage board. C. Foundation Wall: 0.020 inch (0.5 mm) thick waterproofing; 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick at inside Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07140 -4 and external corners; asphalt impregnated board protective cover. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07140 -5 SECTION 07190 WATER REPELLENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water repellents applied to exterior masonry surfaces. B. Surface preparation of substrates. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 642 - Standard Test Method for Density, Absorption, and Voids in Hardened Concrete; 1997. B. ASTM C 672 - Standard Test Method for Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Deicing Chemicals; 2003. C. ASTM D 3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings; 2004. D. ASTM D 5095 - Standard Test Method for Determination of the Nonvolatile Content in Silanes, Siloxanes, and Silane-Siloxane Blends Used in Masonry Water Repellent Treatments; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). E. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com. F. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; 2002. G. National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) 244 Series II. H. National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) 244 Series IV. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, details of tests performed, limitations, and chemical composition. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention; cautionary procedures required during application. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Report whether manufacturer's "best practices" are being followed; if not, state corrective recommendations. Email report to Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. the same day as inspection occurs; mail report on manufacturer's letterhead to Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. within 2 days after inspection. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1. Acceptable to, or licensed by, the manufacturer. 2. Successfully completed not less than ten comparable scale projects using this system. 1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WATER REPELLENTS 07190 -1 A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene a meeting at least one week prior to starting work; require attendance of affected installers; invite Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. and Carlsbad City Library. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperature above 40 degrees F during and 24 hours after installation. B. Do not proceed with application on materials if ice or frost is covering the substrate. C. Do not proceed with application if ambient temperature of surface exceeds 100 degree F. D. Do not proceed with the application of materials in rainy conditions or if heavy rain is anticipated within 4 hours after application. 1.08 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Products shall comply with California state and local regulations concerning AIM (Architectural, Industrial and Maintenance) coatings regarding Volatile Organic Content (VOC). 1. The use of 1,1,1 trichloroethane shall not be allowed. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide ten-year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water C. For warranty repair work, remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Water Repellents: 1. Degussa Corp, Aerosil &Silanes Division; Product CHEM-TRETE BSM 400, 800-828-0919. a. Local Contact: Specified Polymers /J3, 619-294-8010. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Comply with the provisions of the following standards for exterior plaster/stucco: 1. 100% Silane, colorless. 2. Surface Appearance: No change in the surface appearance. 3. NCHRP#244 Series II: 85% reduction in water absorption, 86% reduction in chloride absorption. 4. NCHRP #244 Series IV: 99% reduction in chloride absorption. 5. ASTM G 53, Accelerated Weathering (2000 hours): >99% water repellency. 6. ASTM D 1653, Water Vapor Transmission: 72.5g/fP/24 hours, 100% Breathable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WATER REPELLENTS 07190 -2 C. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter detrimental to application of water repellent. D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Install coverings to protect adjacent surfaces. B. Prepare surfaces to be coated as recommended by water repellent manufacturer for best results. C. Do not start work until plaster/stucco substrate is cured a minimum of 28 days. D. Surface Preparation: 1. Remove dirt, dust and materials that will interfere with the proper and effective application of the penetrating sealer. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to prepare the surfaces of the concrete as recommended in writing by the Water Repellent Manufacturer and acceptable to the Engineer. 2. Sealants, patching materials, and expansion joints shall have been installed and approved by the Engineer. E. Pressure wash surfaces to be coated per manufacturer's written recommendation. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Spray Test: After water repellent has dried, spray coated surfaces with water. 1. After surfaces have adequately dried, recoat surfaces that show water absorption. B. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Furnish written certification that surface preparation method and final condition has manufacturer's approval and comply with the warranty. 2. Test area: Furnish results of test area absorption on each type of substrate. Test results shall determine application rate. C. Test Area: 1. Before a sealer application the following field evaluation will be done. The cost of the field testing will be the responsibility of the Water Repellent Manufacturer. 2. Prepare a three feet by three feet area to be sprayed with the water repellent. The area will be determined by the Owner. Apply the water repellent in a flooding application, from the bottom up to cause the material to run down 6 to 8 inches below the spray pattern. 3. After allowing five days for the sample to cure run a RILEM uptake test on the treated area. Place one tube on the treated and one tube on the untreated area. Owner must be present for the application of the water repellent and the test. 4. Acceptable minimum results are as stated in the warranty provisions. Coverage rate used to pass this test section must be used on entire project. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Apply water repellent in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, using procedures and application methods recommended for best results. B. Apply at rate recommended by manufacturer in writing, continuously over entire surface. C. Product shall be applied as supplied by the manufacturer without dilution or alteration. D. Apply with a low-pressure (15 - 25 psi) airless spray equipment with a fan spray coarse nozzle, flooding the surface to obtain uniform coverage unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. E. Apply at a rate of not less than 150 square foot/gallon (or use guidelines for substrate or test patch data) unless the field tests determine that a heavier rate of application is necessary to Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WATER REPELLENTS 07190 -3 meet the performance requirements. F. Apply at temperature and weather conditions recommended by the manufacturer or written in this specification. G. Follow manufacturer's recommendations concerning protection of glass, metal and other non-porous substrates. Contractor will be responsible to clean all surfaces that are contaminated by the water repellent. H. Follow manufacturer's recommendation concerning protection of plants, grass and other vegetation. Contractor will be responsible for replacing all plants, grass or vegetation damaged by the water repellent. I. Brush apply water repellent only at locations where overspray would affect adjacent materials and where not practicable for spray application. J. Start application at top of wall and work down surface with fog coal to break surface tension. Immediately apply treatment at full strength keeping a wet edge at all times. Avoid letting water repellent dry between passes. K. Provide manufacturer's field service representative to inspect preparation and application work continuously during entire application period to ensure that manufacturer's "best practices" for preparation and application are being followed. 3.05 CLEANING A. As Work Progresses: Clean spillage and overspray from adjacent surfaces using materials and methods as recommended by water repellent manufacturer. B. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces when no longer needed. 3.06 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT WORK A. Protect adjacent landscaping, property, and vehicles from drips and overspray. B. Protect adjacent surfaces not intended to receive water repellent. C. Remove water repellent from unintended surfaces immediately by a method instructed by water repellent manufacturer. 3.07 COMPLETION A. Work that does not conform to specified requirements shall be corrected and/or replaced as directed by the Owners Representative at contractor's expense without extension of time. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WATER REPELLENTS 07190 -4 SECTION 07212 BATT INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall and ceiling construction. B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 240 - Standard Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block; 1997. B. ASTM C 552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 1991. C. ASTM C 612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 1993. D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1998. E. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1996. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1.06 SEQUENCING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt; conforming to the following: 1. Thermal Resistance: R of 30. 2. Thickness: 9-1/2 inch. 3. Facing: Faced on one side with aluminum foil. 4. Recycled Content: 30 percent minimum. 5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E 84. 6. Manufacturers: a. Owens Corning Corp. 7. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. B. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt; conforming to the following: 1. Thermal Resistance: Rof19. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BATT INSULATION 07212 -1 2. Thickness: 5-1/2 inch. 3. Facing: Faced on one side with aluminum foil. 4. Recycled Content: 30 percent minimum. 5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E 84. 6. Manufacturers: a. Owens Corning Corp. 7. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. C. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt; conforming to the following: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 10; smoke developed index of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Combustibility: Non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. 3. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 1.00. 4. Thickness: 3-1/2 inch. 5. Facing: Unfaced. 6. Recycled Content: 30 percent minimum. 7. Product: Sound Attenuation Batts Fiber Glass. 8. Manufacturers: a. Owens Coming Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 9. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. B. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of galvanized steel with washer retainer and clips, to be mechanically fastened to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of irregularities or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior ceiling spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. E. Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane between framing members. F. Retain insulation batts in place with spindle fasteners at 12 inches on center. G. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane. H. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches on center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BATT INSULATION 07212 -2 I. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. 3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center BATT INSULATION 07212 -3 SECTION 07261 WEATHER RESISTANT MEMBRANES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Weather resistant membranes for light commercial buildings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AATCC Test Method 127 - Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test; 1998. B. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000. C. ASTM E 1677 - Standard Specification for an Air Retarder (AR) Material or System for Low-Rise Framed Building Walls; 1995 (Reapproved 2000). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Test Results: Submit copies of test results showing performance characteristics equaling or exceeding those specified. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: DuPont Company; Wilmington, DE; ASD. website: www.cdnstruction.tyvek.com B. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Provide all weather resistant membranes from a single manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Tyvek(R) StuccoWrap Water Resistant Barrier: Spunbonded olefin, nonwoven, non-perforated: 1. Classification: ASTM E 1677, Type I; air leakage at 25 mph wind pressure less than 0.06 cubic feet per minute per square foot. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: Greater than 20 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96 Procedure B. 3. Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 78.7 inches per AATCC Test Method 127. B. Sealing Tape: DuPont Contractor Tape. C. Fasteners: 1. Wood: Nails with large heads or plastic washer heads. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install weather resistant membranes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions over exterior sheathing. B. Seal joints and penetrations through weather resistant membranes with tape and fasteners before installation of finish material. C. Ensure that weather resistant membranes are air tight, free from holes, tears, and punctures. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WEATHER RESISTANT MEMBRANES 07261 -1 D. Tape all window and door penetrations in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WEATHER RESISTANT MEMBRANES 07261 -2 SECTION 07513 COLD PROCESS BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cold Process Built-Up asphaly roofing system and cover board for Terrace Roof areas below paver system. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 1079 B. FM DS 1-28 - Design Wind Loads; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2002. C. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by UL or FMG. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspection agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes as indicated. D. Wind Uplift Test: UL 580 Uplift Resistance of Roofing Assemblies. 1. Minimum 90 Ibs psf. E. FMG Listing: Provide base flashings, perimeter flashings, detail flashings and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a roofing system. 1. FMG 1-49 Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Perimeter Flashings. 2. FMG 1-28 Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Wind Loads to Roof systems and Roof Deck Securement. 3. FMG 1-29 Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Above Deck Roof Components. 4. NCRA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual (Fifth Edition) for construction details and recommendations. 5. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (Fifth Edition) for construction details. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, vapor retarder, surfacing, and fasteners. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Base flashings, crickets, and membrane terminations. D. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples 12x12 inches in size illustrating color specified, Carlsbad City Library Learning Center COLD PROCESS BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07513 -1 including T-shaped side and end lap seam. E. Installer's Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions, finish coating installation, special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. H. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to included in maintenance manuals. I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Carlsbad City Library's name and registered with manufacturer. J. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. 1. Maintain one copy on site. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. C. Installer Shall: 1. Submit an affidavit attesting that Contractor has in place and fully implemented a written Health, Safety and Environmental Plan and the plan is compliant with all applicable Federal, State, and Local regulations. 2. Be experienced in cold applied roofing applications for 10 years minimum. 3. Be acceptable to Owner. 4. Be a manufacturer Certified Contractor. 5. Not have been in Chapter 7 bankruptcy during the last ten (10) years. 6. Provide a list of ten (10) projects available for inspection employing the same roof system. 7. inspection service days utilizing manufacturer's technical inspectors. a. The minimum number of full time Technical Service inspection days will be three (3) days for a project of 200 squares or less. b. The number of days will increase at a rate of one (1) day for each additional 100 squares. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing and FMG approval for roofing system identical to that used for this project. E. Manufacturer Shall: 1. Be Associate Member in good standing with National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) for at least five (5) years. 2. Be approved by Owner. 3. Has not been in Chapter 11 bankruptcy during the last five (5) years. 4. Provide evidence of financial responsibility: Certificate of Insurance showing Products Liability in the amount of $25 million minimum and provide an affidavit signed by a corporate officer showing corporate net worth of $50 million minimum. 5. Provide a copy of Corporate Health, Safety and Welfare policy. 6. Be ISO 9001 registered for at least five (5) years. 7. Furnish a service agreement / warranty. 8. Provide Owner with names of at least five (5) qualified applicators. 9. Provide a Project Closeout Report upon delivery of the project warranty. This report to Carlsbad City Library Learning Center COLD PROCESS BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07513 -2 include: a. Project Specifications. b. Project Summary. c. Progress reports as a result of roof inspections. d. Job-site progress photos. e. Warranty document. f. Owner's manual describing maintenance and emergency repair. F. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from single manufacturer. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. B. Preinstallation conference: Conduct conference at project site. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with the Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspection agency representative, roofing installer, roofing system manufacturer representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipement curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 7. Reveiw governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. C. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. C. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight. D. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. E. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protection during installation. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS Carlsbad City Library Learning Center COLD PROCESS BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07513 -3 A. Coordinate the work with installation of associated counterflashings installed by other sections as the work of this section proceeds. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. C. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's Quality Assurance Plus Warranty and Service Agreement in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories, roof insulation, all sheet metal-related details, and termination details. 2. Manufacturer will provide, at no cost to owner, the following services in Years 2, 5 and 10. a. Inspection by a Technical Service Representative and delivery of a written inspection report documenting roof conditions. b. Preventative maintenance and necessary repairs, including splits, tears, or breaks in the roof membrane system and flashings that threaten the integrity of the roof system and are note exempt from coverage due to neglect, negligence, vandalism, or other exclusion. c. General rooftop housekeeping and clean-up, subject to limits, but generally including removal on incidental debris. 3. Warranty Period: 15 years from the date of Substantial Completion. C. Multiple Roof Systems: One warranty to be issued by single manufacturer to cover all roofs systems specified on same building - Built-up roof and Single Ply roof. D. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's Warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Roofing membrane plies: 1. Tremco, Inc.; 3735 Green Road, Beachwood, Ohio 44122, Tel: 216.292.5000, 800.562.2728 www.tremcoroofing.com 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 ROOFING MEMBRANE PLIES AND SURFACING A. Ply Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, SBS-modified asphalt-impregnated and coated trilaminate Carlsbad City Library Learning Center COLD PROCESS BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07513 -4 sheet, with glass-fiber/polyester/glass-fiber-reinforcing mat, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides. 1. Weight: 31 Ibs/100sqft ASTMD228 2. Tensile Strength MD: 312lbf/in ASTM D 5147 3. Tensile Strength XMD: 290 Ibf/in ASTM D 5147 4. Tear Strength MD: 540 Ibf ASTM D 5147 5. Tear Strength XMD: 558 Ibf ASTM D 5147 6. Elongation MD: 7.2% ASTM D 5147 7. Elongation XMD: 8.3% ASTM D 5147 B. Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type II, SBS modified asphalt-impregnated and coated, glass-fiber cap sheet, with white coarse mineral-granule top surfacing and fine material surfacing on bottom surface. 1. Tensile Strength MD: 120 Ibf/in ASTM D 5147 2. Tensile Strength XMD: 115 Ibf/in ASTM D 5147 3. Tear Strength MD: 70 Ibf ASTM D 5147 4. Tear Strength XMD: 80 Ibf ASTM D 5147 5. Elongation MD: 2.6% ASTM D 5147 6. Elongation XMD: 2.5% ASTM D 5147 2.03 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Flashing Sheet: Elastomeric sheeting compounded from CSPE elastomer laminated to a high strength polyester reinforcing scrim. 1. Color: White 2. Tensile Strength: 225 Ibf/in ASTM D 751-89 3. Tear Strength 90 Ibf ASTM D 751-89 4. Elongation 25% ASTM D 5147 B. Flashing Adhesive: One-part elastomer formulated as an adhesive to bond CSPE Sheeting. 1. Color: White C. Stripping: Polyester mesh. D. Stripping Adhesive: One part elastomeric arcylic-based compound for stripping and waterproofing seams and edges. 1. Color: White E. Glass-Fiber Fabric: Woven glass-fiber cloth, treated with asphalt, complying with ASTM D 1668, Type I. F. Metal Flashing Sheet: 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal. 1. Metal counterflashing. 2. Metal gravel stop. 3. Metal coping. 4. Metal termination bar. 2.04 ASPHALTMATERIALS A. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41 B. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, 1-part asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with built-up roofing membranes and flashings. Each container labeled with UL and FM logos indicating material was manufactured under the specified UL and FM quality assurance programs. 1. Asbestos Content: None ASTM D 276 2. Viscosity: 80,000-200,000 cP ASTM D 2196 3. Density: 8.1 Ib/gal ASTM D 1475 Carlsbad City Library Learning Center COLD PROCESS BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07513 -5 4. VOC: Compliant with local building codes ASTM D 3960 2.05 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: Auxilliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built-up roofing. B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. D. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips are in place. 3.02 WOOD DECK PREPARATION A. Verify flatness and tightness of joints of wood decking. Fill knot holes with latex filler. B. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum. C. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substrates detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. D. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. 3.03 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Install roofing membrane system according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials in compliance with requirements in FMG 4450 adn FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system as listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for fire/windstorm classification indicated. Comply with recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. C. Install roofing system in accordance with the following NRCA Manual Plates and NRCA recommendations; modify as required to comply with requirements of FMG references above: 1. Metal Parapet Cap (Coping) and Base Flashing: Plates BUR-1 and BUR-1S. 2. Embedded Edge Metal Flashing: Plates BUR-3 and BUR-3S. 3. Surface-mount Counterflashing: Plates BUR-4 and BUR-4S. 4. Base Flashing for Wall Supported Deck: Plates BUR-5 and BUR-5S. 5. Base Flashing for Venter Base Sheet: Plates BUR-5A and BUR-5AS. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center COLD PROCESS BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING 07513 -6 6. Expansion Joint with Metal Cover: Plates BUR-7 and BUR-7S. 7. Elongation XMD: 8.3% ASTM D 5147 8. Equipment Support Curb: Plates BUR-9 and BUR-9S. 9. Equipment Support Stand and Typical Rain Collar: Plates BUR-11 and BUR-11S. 10. Raised Curb Detail: Plates BUR-13 and BUR-13S. 11. Skylight, Scuttle, and Smoke Vent: Plates BUR-14 and BUR-14S. 12. Isolated Stack Flashing: Plates BUR-17A and BUR-17AS. 13. Plumbing Vent: Plates BUR-18 and BUR-18S. 14. Penetration Pocket: BUR-19 and BUR-19S. 15. Roof Drain: BUR-20 and BUR-20S. 16. Gutter: BUR-22 and BUR-22S. D. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. E. Where roof slope exceeds 2 inch per 12 inches, install sheets of built-up roofing membrane parallel with slope. 1. Backnail roofing membrane sheets to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. F. Cooperate with testing and inspection agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing roofing system. G. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing membrane sheets are not exposed to precipitation of left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. 1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed. 2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed section of roofing system. 3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. H. Cold Process Asphalt Heating: 1. An in-line heat exchange unit may be used to facilitate application, a. Do not exceed maximum adhesive temperature of 100°F. 2. Heat exchange unit: Use heat transfer oil approved by heating equipment manufacturer. 3. Follow operation procedures recommended by heating equipment manufacturer. I. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. J. Install three lapped courses of roofing membrane ply sheet, extending sheet over and terminated beyond cants. 1. Adhere each ply sheet in a solid coating of cold applied adhesive at a rate required by manufacturer. K. Cap Sheet: Install lapped granulated cap sheet starting at low point of roofing system. Offset laps from laps of preceding ply sheets and align cap sheet without stretching. Lap in direction to shed water. Extend cap sheet over and terminate beyond cants. 1. Adhere to substrate in a solid coating of cold applied adhesive at a rate required by manufacturer. 3.04 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center COLD PROCESS BUILT-U P ASPHALT ROOFING 07513 -7 2. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere to backer sheet in flashing adhesive. 6. Extend base flashing up walls a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 6 inches onto field of roofing membrane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. 1. At parapet walls, extend flashing sheet up entire wall and mechanically fasten at outside edge of nailer below coping cap. 2. At high parapet walls, extend flashing sheet up wall 8-12 inches above roofing membrane adn secure edge with sealant tape adn termination bar fastened at 8 inches on center. 3. Install 24 gauge galvanized metal counter-flashing at all vertically terminated base flashings. D. Install 4 and 6 inch stripping plies where metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofing. 1. Set in flashing adhesive. E. Install all edge metal, metal counterflashing, and metal coping according to NRCA details and industry standards F. Pipe penetrations: Install split lead flashing and strip in edges same as metal edges. G. Irregular penetrations: Use Chem Curb flashing component system. H. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30 inch 4 Ib. lead flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on completed roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with stripping and extend a minimum of 4 inches beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring. 1. Install stripping ply sheets, each set in a continuous coating of asphalt roofing cement. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daily during installation of the Work. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to the Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. D. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center COLD PROCESS BUILT-U P ASPHALT ROOFING 07513 -8 END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center COLD PROCESS BUILT-U P ASPHALT ROOFING 07513 -9 SECTION 07540 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fully adhered Polyisobutylene (PIB) membrane roofing system. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 1079 B. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension; 1998a (Reapproved 2002). C. ASTM D 624 - Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000. D. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Flashings: Provide base flashings, perimeter flashings, detail flashings and component materials that comply with requirements and recommendations of the following: 1. FMG 1-49 Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Perimeter Flashings. 2. FMG 1-29 Loss Prevention Data Sheet for Above Deck Roof Components. 3. NCRA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual (Fifth Edition) for construction details and recommendations. 4. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (Fifth Edition) for construction details. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, vapor retarder, surfacing, and fasteners. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Base flashings, crickets, and membrane terminations. D. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples 12x12 inches in size illustrating color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. E. Installer's Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions, finish coating installation, special procedures, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. H. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to included in maintenance manuals. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 -1 I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Carlsbad City Library's name and registered with manufacturer. J. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. 1. Maintain one copy on site. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. C. Installer Shall: 1. Submit an affidavit attesting that Contractor has in place and fully implemented a written Health, Safety and Environmental Plan and the plan is compliant with all applicable Federal, State, and Local regulations. 2. Be experienced in cold applied roofing applications for 10 years minimum. 3. Be acceptable to Owner. 4. Be a manufacturer Certified Contractor. 5. Not have been in Chapter 7 bankruptcy during the last ten (10) years. 6. Provide a list of ten (10) projects available for inspection employing the same roof system. 7. inspection service days utilizing manufacturer's technical inspectors. a. The minimum number of full time Technical Service inspection days will be three (3) days for a project of 200 squares or less. b. The number of days will increase at a rate of one (1) day for each additional 100 squares. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing and FMG approval for roofing system identical to that used for this project. E. Manufacturer Shall: 1. Be Associate Member in good standing with National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) for at least five (5) years. 2. Be approved by Owner. 3. Has not been in Chapter 11 bankruptcy during the last five (5) years. 4. Provide evidence of financial responsibility: Certificate of Insurance showing Products Liability in the amount of $25 million minimum and provide an affidavit signed by a corporate officer showing corporate net worth of $50 million minimum. 5. Provide a copy of Corporate Health, Safety and Welfare policy. 6. Be ISO 9001 registered for at least five (5) years. 7. Furnish a service agreement / warranty. 8. Provide Owner with names of at least five (5) qualified applicators. 9. Provide a Project Closeout Report upon delivery of the project warranty. This report to include: a. Project Specifications. b. Project Summary. c. Progress reports as a result of roof inspections. d. Job-site progress photos. e. Warranty document. f. Owner's manual describing maintenance and emergency repair. F. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from single manufacturer. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 -2 G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by UL or FMG. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspection agency. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes as indicated. 2. Fire-Resistance ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATIONMEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. B. Preinstallation conference: Conduct conference at project site. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Meet with the Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspection agency representative, roofing installer, roofing system manufacturer representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipement curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 7. Reveiw governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. C. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. C. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight D. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. E. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protection during installation. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with installation of associated counterflashings installed by other sections as the work of this section proceeds. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 -3 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. C. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. D. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's Quality Assurance Plus Warranty and Service Agreement in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories, roof insulation, all sheet metal-related details, and termination details. 2. Manufacturer will provide, at no cost to owner, the following services in Years 2, 5 and 10. a. Inspection by a Technical Service Representative and delivery of a written inspection report documenting roof conditions. b. Preventative maintenance and necessary repairs, including splits, tears, or breaks in the roof membrane system and flashings that threaten the integrity of the roof system and are note exempt from coverage due to neglect, negligence, vandalism, or other exclusion. c. General rooftop housekeeping and clean-up, subject to limits, but generally including removal on incidental debris. 3. Warranty Period: 15 years from the date of Substantial Completion. C. Multiple Roof Systems: One warranty to be issued by single manufacturer to cover all roofs systems specified on same building - Built-up roof and Single Ply roof. D. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's Warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. PIB Membrane Materials: 1. Tremco, Inc.; 3735 Green Road, Beachwood, Ohio 44122, Tel: 216.292.5000, 800.562.2728 www.tremcoroofing.com 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Membrane: PIB; reinforced. High density Polyisobutylene elastomer roof membrane factory laminated to a non-woven polyester fleece reinforcing backer and factory applied self-seaming tape. 1. Thickness: 120 mil. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 -4 2. Tensile Strength: 175 Ibf, measured in accordance with ASTM D 751. 3. Ultimate Elongation: 60-100 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D751. 4. Tear Strength: 25 Ibf, measured in accordance with ASTM D 751. 5. Hydrostatic resistance: 200 psi 6. Energy Star rated. B. Auxilliary Materials 1. General: Auxilliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. a. Liquid-type auxilliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness and color as PIB sheet membrane. 3. Roof membrane and Flashing adhesive: Manufacturer's specific bonding adhesive designed for adhering fleece backed PIB material. a. Manufacturer's recommended primer for seams. 4. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, pre-punched. 5. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Drain Pan: 4 Ib. lead pan B. Counterflashings: Two-piece 24 gauge galvanized metal PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips are in place. 3.02 WOOD DECK PREPARATION A. Verify flatness and tightness of joints of wood decking. Fill knot holes with latex filler. B. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with 12 percent moisture maximum. C. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substrates detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. D. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. E. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.03 MEMBRANE APPLICATION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 -5 A. Install roofing membrane system according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions. B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Where roof slope exceeds 2 inch per 12 inches, install sheets of roofing membrane parallel with slope. 1. Backnail roofing membrane sheets to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. D. Cooperate with testing and inspection agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing roofing system. E. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation and roofing membrane sheets are not exposed to precipitation of left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. 1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed. 2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed section of roofing system. 3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. F. Accurately align roofing membrane and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. 1. Adhere membrane according for manufacturer's instructions. 2. Overlap side laps 3 inch minimum and end laps 2 inch minimum. 3. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of roofing membrane. 4. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 5. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet requirements. G. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring. 3.04 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. B. Prime seams areas and allow to dry. Remove protective release paper from factory applied self-sealing seam tape and firmly roll sheet flashings into place. Roll entire seam area with steel roller to assure proper bonding. C. Extend base flashing up walls a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 6 inches onto field of roofing membrane. 1. At high walls, mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing using butyl tape and termination bar. D. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30 inch 4 Ib. lead flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on completed roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with stripping and extend a minimum of 4 inches beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring. 1. Install stripping ply sheets, each set in a continuous coating of asphalt roofing cement. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 -6 1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daily during installation of the Work. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to the Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. D. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540 -7 SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, and other items indicated in Schedule. B. Reglets and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07530 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Roofing system at terrace. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2004a. B. ASTM B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004. C. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2000. D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two samples 12x12 inch in size illustrating metal finish color. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 5 years of documented experience. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATIONCONFERENCE A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -1 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with fluorocarbon coating. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Stainless Steel, with soft neoprene washers. B. Underlayment: Per section 07130. C. Slip Sheet: Integral to underlayment. D. Protective Backing Paint: FS TT-C-494, Bituminous. E. Sealant: Type B1 specified in Section 07900. F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat, except as otherwise indicated. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound, nominally free of sulfur components and other deleterious impurities. H. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, non-drying, nonmigrating sealant. I. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part noncorrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by metal manufacturer for exterior/interior nonmoving joints including riveted joints. J. Solder: ASTM B 32; SnSO (50/50) type. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, minimum four inches wide, interlocking with sheet. C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. E. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form drip. 2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Gutters: Profile as indicated. B. Downspouts: Round profile. C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 100 years in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Brackets. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets. 4. Downspout Strainer: Same material as gutter and held in place by friction. E. Seal metal joints. PARTS EXECUTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -2 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant. C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Conform to drawing details: 1. Counter Flashings: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Detail 4-4C. 2. Roof Penetration Flashing: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Detail 4-14B. B. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with lead wedges. Pack remaining spaces with lead wool. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant. C. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. D. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. E. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. F. Curved Flashing: Flashing to be smooth and curved. Segmented flashing is not permitted. G. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. H. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. I. Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot minimum. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Supplemental Section 4-1.4 - Test of Materials, for field inspection requirements. B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Gutters and Downspouts: B. Coping, Cap, Parapet, Sill and Ledge Flashings: C. Counterflashings at Roofing Terminations (over roofing base flashings): Stainless steel. D. Counterflashings at Curb-Mounted Roof Items: E. Roofing Penetration Flashings, for Pipes, Structural Steel, and Equipment Supports: Lead sheet. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 -3 SECTION 07816 INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thin-film intumescent fire-resistive coating for exposed interior structural steel. B. Decorative topcoat. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. B. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field-applied paints matching intumescent fireproofing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property — Durometer Hardness; 2004. B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. C. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2000a. D. SSPC-PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages; 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Performance characteristics and test results. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods. C. Selection Samples: For decorative top coat, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and sheens. D. Verification Samples: For each thickness, color, sheen, and finish required, samples not less than 4 inches square on steel substrate, illustrating finished appearance. E. Test Reports: Published fire-resistive designs for structural elements of the types required for the project, indicating hourly ratings of each assembly. F. Certificates: Certify that intumescent fireproofing provided for this project meets or exceeds specified requirements in all respects. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company that specializes in manufacturing the type of products specified, with minimum of 10 years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Approved, certified, or supervised by manufacturer of intumescent fireproofing, with not less than 5 years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with identification labels and testing agency markings intact and legible. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING 07816 -1 B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 1. Store at temperatures not less than 50 degrees F in dry, protected area. 2. Protect from freezing, and do not store in direct sunlight. 3. Dispose of any materials that have come into contact with contaminants of any kind prior to application. C. Dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect areas of application from windblown dust and rain. B. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1. Provide temporary enclosures as required to control environmental conditions. 2. Do not apply intumescent fireproofing when ambient temperatures are below 50 degrees F without specific approval from manufacturer. 3. Maintain relative humidity between 40 and 60 percent in areas of application. 4. Maintain ventilation in enclosed spaces during application and for not less than 72 hours afterward. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Intumescent Fireproofing: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Fireproofing: Provide intumescent thin-film fire-resistive coating systems tested by an independent testing agency in accordance with ASTM E 119 and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide assemblies listed by UL or FM. B. Structural Steel Columns: Fire resistance rating of 1 hour. C. Structural Steel Beams: Fire resistance rating of 1 hour. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Interior Fire-Resistive Coating System: Water-based, asbestos-free, factory-mixed thin film intumescent coating system with smooth and uniform finish texture. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84: a. Flame Spread Index: 25, maximum. b. Smoke Developed Index: 50, maximum. 2. Hardness: 80, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240, Type D durometer. 3. Density: 11.4 Ib/gallon, minimum. B. Protective and Decorative Top Coating: As recommended by fireproofing manufacturer for exposure conditions. 1. Color and Gloss: as selected by Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc.. 2. Coordinate with paint specified in Section 09900 for color and sheen match between steel coated with intumescent coating and adjacent painted surfaces. C. Primer: As required by tested and listed assemblies, and as recommended by fireproofing manufacturer to suit specific substrate conditions. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center INTUMESCENT F/REPROOFING 07816 -2 PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to determine if they are in satisfactory condition to receive intumescent fireproofmg. Verify that they are clean and free of oil, grease, incompatible primers, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond to fireproofing system. B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean surfaces to receive fireproofing. B. Repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness of fireproofing system. Remove minor projections and fill voids that could telegraph through the finished work. C. Cover or otherwise protect other work that might be damaged by fallout or overspray of fireproofing system. Provide temporary enclosures as necessary to confine operations and maintain required environmental conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. B. Apply manufacturer's recommended primer to required coating thickness. C. Apply fireproofing to full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Apply coats at manufacturer's recommended rate to achieve dry film thickness required for fire resistance ratings designated for each condition. D. Apply intumescent fireproofing by spraying to maximum extent possible. If necessary, complete coverage by roller application or other method acceptable to manufacturer. E. Achieve uniform finished appearance complying with approved mock-up. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01400. 1. Arrange for testing of installed intumescent fireproofing by an independent testing laboratory using magnetic thickness gage, in accordance with SSPC-PA2. 2. Submit test reports promptly to and Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc.. B. Repair or replace fireproofmg at locations where test results indicate fireproofing does not meet specified requirements. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation of fireproofing in each area, remove overspray and fallout from other surfaces and clean soiled areas. B. Protect installed intumescent fireproofing from damage due to subsequent construction activities, so fireproofing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION arichari r.itv I ihrarv Learnina Center INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Precompressed foam sealers. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories. B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 834 • Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2000. B. ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2002. C. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2002. D. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005. E. ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber; 2000. F. ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam); 1997. G. ASTM D 2628 - Standard Specification for Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for concrete Pavements; 1991 (Reapproved 1998). H. BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and Sealant Products; www.baaqmd.gov; current edition. I. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of each referenced document covering installation requirements on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years experience. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Carlsbad City Library Learning Center JOINT SEALERS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Silicone Sealants: 1. Dow Corning Corp; Product 795: www.dowcorning.com. 2. GE Plastics; Product Ultrapruf II SCS2900: www.geplastics.com. 3. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Degussa Building Systems/Sonneborn; Product SL2-SLOPE: www.chemrex.com. 2. SIKA 2C-SLOPE 3. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. C. Butyl Sealants: 1. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. D. Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers: 1. EmsealJointSystems, Ltd: www.emseal.com. 2. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.sandellmfg.com. 3. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com. 4. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168 and the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51. B. Type A - General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component. C. Type B - Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Precompressed foam sealer; urethane with water-repellent; D. Type C - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. E. Type D - Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component, mildew resistant. 1. Applications: Use for: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center JOINT SEALERS F. Type E - Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning. 1. Applications: Use for concealed locations only: a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track and floor. G. Type F - Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; single component. 1. Approved by manufacturer for wide joints up to 1 -112 inches. 2. Color Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Expansion joints in floors. H. Type G - Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25, Uses T; multi- component. I. Type H - Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center JOINT SEALERS F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. I. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect sealants until cured. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Type is Indicated: Type A. B. Control and Expansion Joints in Paving: Type G. C. Exterior Wall Expansion Joints: Type A. D. Lap Joints in Exterior Sheet Metal Work: Type H. E. Butt Joints in Exterior Metal Work and Siding: Type H. F. Joints Between Exterior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work (except masonry): Type A. G. Under Exterior Door Thresholds: TypeH. H. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type C; colors as selected. I. Control and Expansion Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs and Floors: Type F. J. Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Walls and Floors, and Between Countertops and Walls: Type D. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center JOINT SEALERS 07900 -4 SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames. B. Fire-rated steel doors and frames. C. Thermally insulated steel doors. D. Steel glazing frames. E. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. B. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 1998. B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. C. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998. D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2004a. E. ASTM A1008M - Standard for cold rolled material F. ASTM B117 - Standard test for salt spray testing G. ASTM D2197 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion of Organic Coatings by Scrape Adhesion H. ASTM D2247 - Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. I. ASTM D2794 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). J. ASTM D3361 - Standard Practice for Unfiltered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings. K. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. L. DHIA115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000 (ANSI/DHIA115 Series). M. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1999. N. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1999. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES O. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association; 2003. P. UBC 7-2-97, UBC 7-4-97 Positive Pressure Q. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. R. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1997. S. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1998. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. D. Samples: Submit two samples of metal, 2x2 inches in size showing factory finishes, colors, and surface texture. E. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Installer: Individuals that are "Certified Prefinished Frame Installers" for the installation of site assembled door frames. C. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Accept frames on site in manufacturer's box packaging with identification labels intact. Inspect for damage. C. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. D. Do not open individual boxes until installation is to begin. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Timely Industries, A Division of SDS Industries, Inc. 10241 Norn's Avenue, Pacoima, CA 91331-2292; tel 800-247-6242 or 818-492-3500; fax 818-492-3530: www.timelyframes.com. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI A117.1. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -2 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 4. Glazed Lights: • Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 5. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHIA115 Series, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 6. Galvanizing for units exposed to building exterior: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed), A60/ZF180. 7. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 2. Core: Polystyrene foam. 3. Top Closures for Outswinging Doors: Flush with top of faces and edges. 4. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08710. B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. Core: Cardboard honeycomb. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Interior Doors, Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C ("positive pressure"). 3. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, with temperature rise ratings as required by code, tested in accordance with NFPA 252. a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL. b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit. 4. Core: Mineral fiberboard. D. Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors. 2.04 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except: a. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: 14 gage frames. 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 4. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -3 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08710. C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Drywall slip-on type. D. Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Face welded type. 1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled. E. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. 2.05 FRAME CASINGS A. Material: Aluminum casings with corner alignment clips. B. Interior Door Frames: Aluminum Type: Aluminum, Model TA-28, full face, with corner alignment clips. 2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; factory-painted finish, color as selected; factory-installed. 1. Style: Sightproof inverted V blade. 2. Fasteners: Concealed fasteners. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08800, factory installed. C. Removable Stops: Rolled steel bar, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. D. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08710. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Steel, shape as required to accomplish fire rating. E. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. F. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames. 2.07 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM MMMA840. B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that Carlsbad City Library Learning Center STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -4 pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. E. Coordinate installation of hardware. F. Coordinate installation of glazing. G. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straightedge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -5 SECTION 08162 ALUMINUM SLIDING DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sliding doors, jambs, hardware, with floor track; two-leaf. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 08800 - Glazing. C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications 1.03 REFERENCES A. AA - Aluminum Association B. AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute D. NFRC - National Fenestration Ratings Council, Inc. E. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. X Panel: Aluminum sliding glass doors. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications. C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of doors, glazing, details of construction, and interface with other products. D. Finish/ color samples. Such samples may include, but are not limited to the following: frame sections, glass, fasteners, anchors mullion sections and corner construction. E. warranties F. Operating and Maintenance Data: Operating and maintenance instructions, and parts lists. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Factory-trained, with minimum 3 years of experience. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide warranty for the following term: 1. Doors: 20 years. C. Include coverage for warping beyond specified installation tolerances and defective materials. D. Any deficiencies or failures of the materials or installation, during the warranty period, will be Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ALUMINUM SLIDING DOORS 08162 -1 repaired or replaced by the responsible installing contractor at no cost to the General Contractor or the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Arcadia Architectural Products; 60 Bonner Street, Stamford, CT; Tel: (203) 316-8000 Fax: (203) 316-8200. B. All aluminum Sliding Glass Doors specified under this section are to be supplied by a single manufacturer. C. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. All doors shall be fabricated from aluminum extrusions of alloy 6063-75 and shall be free of defects which impair strength or appearance. B. The sill shall contain a full-length nylon track cap. C. Sliding panels shall be equipped with two adjustable stainless steel tandem rollers incorporating factory lubricated sealed radial ball bearings and shall be adjustable without removing panel from frame. D. Glazing channel shall be flexible black polyvinyl chloride material per standard CS-230-60 and shall be available 5/8" insulating glass units, 3/16" and 1/4" single glazing. 2.03 Finish: Natural anodized, medium bronze. Finish all exposed areas of aluminum and other components as indicated. 2.04 Fabrication A. The frame shall provide self-aligning rigid joint assembly using screws and must be back caulked to insure a weather-resistant seal. B. The profile of the fixed jamb shall include a pocket to receive anc conceal the fixed stile producing a flush sight line. The profiles of the latching jamb shall include a recess to receive the lock stile. C. Panel members shall be of the mortise type to provide strong interlocking, mechanically fastened, hairline joints. D. Sliding panels shall be located on the exterior or interior and both sliding and fixed panels shall be removable for re-glazing and maintenance. E. The sliding panel, when in a locked position, shall not be removable from the outside. F. The fixed panel shall be held in position at both the top, middle and bottom be specially designed angular clips (referred to as fixed panel retaining clips) which are fastened to the fixed jamb, as well as retained by a head clip which is fastened to the top of the fixed interlocker and fastened to the head of the frame and by the sill cover threshold. G. The interlockers and locking stiles shall be heavy gauge tubular sections assuring precise alignment and to resist twisting under load conditions. H. Sill members shall provide a continuous water barrier without any notching and shall incorporate a pressure equalization area. PART 3 EXECUTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ALUMINUM SLIDING DOORS 08162 -2 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that door openings are plumb, square, and ready for installation of sliding doors. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install sliding doors, frames, hardware, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install floor track in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust doors for proper operation, without binding or scraping and without excessive noise. B. Upon completion of the entire scope of the work specified within this Section, the aluminum Sliding Glass Doors and components are to be cleaned of dirt and manufacturers identification marks. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ALUMINUM SLIDING DOORS 08162 -3 SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non-rated. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08710 -DoorHardware. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004. B. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2003. C. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. D. WDMA NWWDA I.S.1-A - Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers Association (formerly NWWDA); 2004. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3. Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special blocking for hardware. D. Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 6x6 inch in size cut from top corner of door. E. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 6x6 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing. B. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1300, Premium Grade. Maintain one copy on site. C. Finish doors in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1500. D. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FLUSH WOOD DOORS wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide warranty for the following term: 1. Interior Doors: Life of installation. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com. 2. Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com. 3. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com. 4. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4-1.6: Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 DOQRS A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Standard: AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1300, Premium Grade with A grade veneer. 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated. B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. 2. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish. 2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core Doors: AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1300, Type PC - Particleboard B. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated above. 2.04 DOOR FACINGS A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Species as specified above, veneer grade as specified by quality standard, plain sliced, book veneer match, running assembly match; unless otherwise indicated. B. Interior Doors - Veneer: Premium grade wood veneer, oak species, plain sliced, with slip matched grain, for transparent finish. C. Facing Adhesive: Type II - water resistant. 2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with Stiles and Rails: Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -2 C. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement. D. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. E. F. All Exposed Edges - Veneer Faces: Hardwood for transparent finish. G. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. H. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. I. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. 1. Exception: Doors to be field finished. J. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated, See Storm Water Management Plan and sheets C5.0, C6.0 and C7.0 in construction documents. K. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1700. 2.06 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Factory finish doors in accordance with specified quality standard: 1. Transparent Finish: Transparent conversion varnish, Premium quality, satin sheen. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. B. Field-Finished Doors: Trimming to fit is acceptable. C. Adjust width of non-rated doors by cutting equally on both jamb edges. 1. Trim maximum of 3/4 inch off bottom edges. D. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch (19 mm). E. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/16 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/16 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/16 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FLUSH WOOD DOORS 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. 3.05 SCHEDULE - See Drawings END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08305 LIFT-SLIDING AND SLIDING-FOLDING GLASS DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bi-fold panel triple laminated wood and glass door system, including wood/aluminum frame, panels, running hardware, weather stripping and glass designed to provide an opening glass wall or storefront, with sizes and configurations as shown on drawings and specified herein, with Sunflex USA system or approved equal. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors; 1997 with revisions contained in "reprinting" of 1999. B. ANSI 297.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. C. ASTM E 283 - Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior windows, curtain walls and Doors by uniform Static Air Pressure. D. ASTM 330 - Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential. E. CPSC 16CFR-1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature and data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Independently tested data listing performance criteria. 3. Installation methods. 4. Contract Closeout Submittal: Submit Owner's Data from Manufacturer for care and maintenance. C. Door Schedule: Each door listed by number correlated to drawings, with items of hardware to be installed. D. Keying information, for Carlsbad City Library's approval. E. Detail Drawings indicating dimensions, direction of opening, swing panels (if applicable), typical head jamb, side jamb and sill details, and type of glazing to be supplied. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer to provide complete, precision built, engineered, pre-fitted units by a single source manufacturer with at least ten (10) years experience in providing sliding bi-fold or single panel door systems. B. Performance Requirements: Unit to comply with applicable manufacturers independently certified testing results. Testing includes, but is not limited to: air filtration, in accordance with ASTM E 283. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide Manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. B. Provide two-year warranty for all components except seal failure of installed glass supplied. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LIFT-SLIDING AND SLIDING-FOLDING GLASS DOORS Glass seal shall be warranted for five years from date of Substantial Completion of project. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS, DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site in sealed unopened crates. Protect units from damage and store material in dry weather-protected area. If taken from crates, store sealed in plastic wrap or visquien material and store doors lying on long edge or flat to prevent warping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer - Sliding-Folding Doors: One of the following: 1. Nana Wall Systems, Inc; 707 Redwood Highway, Mill Valley, CA 94941. Tel: (800) 873-5673 or (415) 383-3148. Fax: (415) 383-0312. www.nanawallsystems.com. 2. Sunflex USA Product SF-65 Bi-fold Panel System; 4227 E. Edgemont Avenue, Pheonix, AZ 85008. Tel: (602) 956-5861. Fax: (602) 954-8861. Email: Jssunflexusa@aol.com. Website: www.sunflexusa.com. B. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals, for substitutions. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Frame and Panels: Provide manufacturers standard 65 mm profiles, head track, side jambs, and panels with dimensions shown on drawings. Provide floor track Aluminum Extrusions with nominal thickness of .098 (2.5mm). Alloy as specified as AtMgsi 0.5 with strength rated as 6063.T-5. Finish: Standard clear coats on all wood for field finish or factory finish as required and anodizing on aluminum parts. B. Glazing: Provide laminated glazing as required for high impact resistance. All glazing to comply with ANSI Z97 requirements. C. Locking Hardware and Handles: 1. Powder coat flat handles to match color chosen by Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. 2. Aluminum locking rods to be capped with Polyamide at top and bottom tips. 3. Provide handle height as required. Normal height is 41-3/8" from bottom of panel. D. Sliding and Running Hardware: 1. Each pair of panels will be supplied with a patented load bearing bottom or upper running carriage attached to a pair of panels and hinge assembly. Opposite end shall have a pair of Polyamide rollers attached to patented hinges to assure even smooth operation of paired panels. Polyamide running carriage to have sealed bearings for smooth quiet operation. 2. All panels will be provided with stainless steel hinge pins and self-lubricating hinges. E. Other Components: 1. Provide matching aluminum floor track as required. 2. Weather Stripping: Provide manufacturer's standard double layer APTK, EPDM or brush seals on both inner and outer edge of door panels as required. F. Use wood frame and panel profiles, and stainless steel screws to make all connections, not aluminum or high impact Polymide corner connectors. G. Sizes and Configurations: See Drawings or selected custom dimensions within the maximum frame size allowable as indicated by manufacturer for bottom running system or top running system as required by Architect. H. Manufacturer must be able to supply matching sidelights, transoms and windows if required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LIFT-SLIDING AND SLIDING-FOLDING GLASS DOORS A. Do not begin installation until door openings and supports are complete. B. Notify Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Verify all dimensions, specifically the structural integrity of the header section. Header must maintain a live load not to exceed L/720 and 1/4". B. Examine all surfaces and opening and verify dimensions. System must be installed square, plumb, and level. C. If required, provide drain connections from lower track. D. Install panels, handles and locksets in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations and installation instructions. E. Make all final adjustments for proper operation. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center LIFT-SLIDING AND SLIDING-FOLDING GLASS DOORS 08305 -3 SECTION 08310 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Access door and frame units, fire-rated and non-fire-rated, in wall locations. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. B. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoin ing work. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements and rough-in dimensions. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with other work requiring access doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Access Doors: 1. Nystrom; Product RW Series: www.nystrom.com. 2. Williams Brothers Corporation; Product WB-RDW: www.wbdoors.com. 3. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 ACCESS DOOR UNITS - WALLS A. Door and Frame Units: Formed steel. 1. Frames and flanges: 0.0598 inch steel. 2. Door panels: 0.0598 inch single thickness steel sheet. a. Type: 5/8 inch deep pan for installation of gypsum board panel. 3. Size: As indicated on drawings. 4. Hardware: a. Hinge: Fully concealed pivot hinge. b. Hinge: 175 degree steel piano hinge with removable pin. c. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock. 5. Prime coat with baked on primer. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Weld, fill, and grind joints to ensure flush and square unit. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08310 -1 A. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08310 -2 SECTION 08410 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Entrance and storefront systems, complete with reinforcing, fasteners, anchors and attachment devices. B. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass. C. Aluminum doors and frames. D. Weatherstripping. E. Accessories necessary to complete work. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Steel attachment members. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel attachment devices. C. Section 07840 - Firestopping: Firestop at system junction with structure. D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. E. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section. F. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; The Aluminum Association, Inc.; 2003. B. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2004. C. AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2003 (part of AAMA 501). D. AAMA 503.1 - Test Method for Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Systems. E. AAMA 608.1 - Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. F. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998. G. AAMA Manual #10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. H. AAMA SFM 1 - Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. I. ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped. J. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 2002. K. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. L. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS M. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004. N. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2004a. 0. ASTM B 308 - Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes, Rolled or Extruded. P. ASTM C 509 - Cellular Elastomeric Pre-formed Gasket and Sealing Material. Q. ASTM C 864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks and Spacers. R. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004. S. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002. T. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000. U. Federal Specifications TT-P-645A - Primer, Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type. V. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify nor solve problems of thermal or structural movement, glazing, anchorage or moisture disposal. B. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimension of units, sight lines and profiles of members. C. Provide concealed fastening. D. Provide entrance and storefront systems, including necessary modifications, to meet specified requirements and maintaining visual design concepts. E. Attachment considerations are to take into account site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening or fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. F. Anchors, fasteners and braces shall be structurally stressed not more than 50% of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied. G. Provide for expansion and contraction without detriment to appearance or performance. H. Assemblies shall be free from rattles, wind whistles and noise due to thermal and structural movement and wind pressure. 1. Not Permitted: Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system. J. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. 1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 330 code. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08410 -2 2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/175 in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. B. System shall not deflect more than 1/8" at the centerpoint, or 1/16" at the centerpoint of a horizontal member, once deadload point have been established. C. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. D. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. E. Water Resistance: No water leakage, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a static test pressure of 15 Ibf/sq ft. F. Dynamic Water Resistance: No water leakage, when measured in accordance with AAMA 501.1-94 with a dynamic test pressure of 15 Ibf/sq ft. G. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) in accordance with AAMA 1503.1-88 shall not be less than 55. H. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. I. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 180 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. J. Thermal Transmittance: (U-value) in accordance with AAMA 1503.1-88 shall not be more than .65 BTU, hr/degree F/SF. K. Seismic testing shall conform to AAMA recommended static test method for evaluating performance of curtain walls and storefront wall systems due to horizontal displacements associated with seismic movements and building sway. L. Sound transmission in accordance with ASTM E 90. M. Testing Requirements: Provide components that have been previously tested by an independent testing laboratory. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, dimensional limitations. E. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents. F. Samples: Submit two samples 6x6 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface, glass, glazing materials. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08410 -3 G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. H. Report of field testing for water leakage. I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Carlsbad City Library's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in California. B. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with installation of other building components or materials. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.12 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. E. Warranty shall cover following: 1. Complete watertight and airtight system installation within specified tolerances. 2. Completed installation will remain free from rattles, wind whistles and noise due to thermal and structural movement and wind pressure. 3. System is structurally sound and free from distortion. 4. Glass and glazing gaskets will not break or "pop" from frames due to design wind, expansion or contraction movement. 5. Glazing sealants and gaskets will remain free from abnormal deterioration or dislocation due to sunlight, weather or oxidation. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Arcadia, Inc., 3225 East Washington Blvd, Vernon, CA ; Tel: (323) 269-7300 Fax: (323) Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 269-7390. 1. Arcadia, Inc., T500 Series (OPG-6000), 2-1/4" x 6" pressure plate glazed system for 1" insulated glazing. 2. Arcadia, Inc., AR450 Series, 2" x 4-1/2" center glazed system for 1/4" glass (screw spline/ shear block system). B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Finish: Class I color anodized. 2. Color: Medium bronze. B. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken. 2. Glazing stops: Flush. 3. Cross-Section: 6x2 inch nominal dimension. 4. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of structural steel member. C. Doors: Glazed aluminum. 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Wall Thickness: 0.125 inch. 3. Top Rail: 3-3/16" inches wide. 4. Vertical Stiles: 3-1/2" inches wide. 5. Bottom Rail: 9-1/2" inches wide. 6. Glazing Stops: Square. 7. Finish: Same as storefront. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Framing members, transition members, mullions, adaptors, and mounting: Extruded 6063-T5 aluminum alloy (ASTM B221 - Alloy G.S. 10a T5). B. Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M; galvanized in accordance with requirements of ASTM A 123/A 123M. C. Screws, fastening devices, and internal components: Stainless steel in accordance with ASTM.A-164. Perimeter anchors shall be aluminum or steel, providing the steel is properly isolated from aluminum. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners, except where unavoidable for application of hardware. 2. For exposed locations, provide countersunk Phillips head screws with finish matching items fastened. 3. Provide nuts or washers of design having means to prevent disengagement; deforming of fastener threads is unacceptable. D. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members. E. Concealed Flashings: 0.018 inch thick aluminum. F. Perimeter Sealant: As specified in Section 07900 G. Glass: As specified in Section 08800. H. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08410 -5 1. Compression type design, replaceable, molded or extruded, of santoprene, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM). 2. Conform to ASTM C509 or C864 3. Profile and hardness as required to maintain uniform pressure for watertight seal. 4. Provide in manufacturer's standard black color. I. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08800. J. Weatherstripping: 1. Wool pile conforming to AAMA 701.2; or extruded EPDM elastomeric conforming to ASTM C509 or C864. 2. Provide EPDM or vinyl blade gasket Weatherstripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold. K. "Anti-Walk" Edge Blocking: "W" shaped EPDM blocks for use in keeping glazing material stationary under vibration or seismic loading. L. Baffles (at weep holes): Type as recommended by system manufacturer and shown in published installation instructions. M. Screens: Tubular aluminum frames; screen cloth securely held in place by means of reusable vinyl splines; 18 by 16 aluminum screen cloth. N. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich. 2.04 FINISHES A. An Architectural Class I Color Anodic Finish: Conforming with AA-M12C22A34/AA-M12C22A44. Integrally colored anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick. B. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application. 2.05 HARDWARE A. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08710. B. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors. C. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and comers. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. F. Reinforce components internally for door hardware. G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. H. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. I. Continuous sub-sill shall be provided under sill members to collect water infiltration and divert from the interior of the system. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS J. Fasteners shall be so located as to ensure concealment from view in the final assembly. K. Framing members shall be internally reinforced and secured at head and sill as necessary for structural performance requirements, for hardware attachment, and as indicated. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. C. Fabricate units to withstand loads which will be applied when system is in place. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide members of size, shape and profile indicated, designed to provide for glazing from exterior. B. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. D. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. E. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. F. Fabricate frame assemblies with joints straight and tight fitting. G. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. H. Reinforce internally with structural members as necessary to support design loads. I. Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. J. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. K. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. L. Seal horizontals and direct moisture accumulation to exterior. M. Provide flashings and other materials used internally or externally that are corrosive resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding and compatible with adjoining materials. N. Provide manufacturer's extrusions and accessories to accommodate expansion and contraction due to temperature changes without being detrimental to appearance or performance. O. Make provisions in framing for minimum edge clearance, nominal edge cover and nominal pocket width for thickness and type of glazing or infill used in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer and FGMA Glazing Manual. P. Provide tight fitting, injection molded, plastic water deflectors at all intermediate horizontals Q. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. R. Install hardware using templates provided. 1. See Section 08710 for hardware installation requirements. 2. Refer to Section 08710 for installation requirements. S. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, using glazing method required to achieve Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08410 -7 performance criteria. T. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900. U. Entrance Doors: 1. Fabricate with mechanical joints using internal reinforcing plates and shear blocks attached with fasteners and by welding. 2. Provide extruded aluminum glazing stops of square design, permanently anchored on security side and removable on opposite side. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Limit variations from plumb and level: 1. 1/8 inch in 10 feet vertically 2. 1/8 inch in 20 feet horizontally B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. C. Limit variations from theoretical locations: 1/4 inch (6 mm) for any member at any location. D. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.4 - Test of Materials, for independent testing and inspection requirements. Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove protective material from pre-fmished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from comers. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. D. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. E. Protect finished work from damage. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. T500 Series (OPG-6000). 1. Window: 1A a. Cross Section: 2-1/4 x 6 inches. B. AR450 Series 1. Window: 2V a. Cross Section: 2x4-1/2 inches. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 08410 -8 SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum double hung, horizontal rolling, fixed, and casement windows. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 08800 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC), and Wood Windows and Glass Doors; 1997 with revisipns contained in "reprinting" of 12/99. (ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2) B. AAMA 1503.1 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors, and Glazed Wall Sections; 1998. C. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 1998. D. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 1991. E. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1997. F. ASTM E 547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential; 1996. G. ASTM F 588 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact; 1997. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications. 1. For fixed windows, submit evidence that fabrication of fixed windows has not resulted in any corner or joint failure or glass breakage for a period of not less than 10 years. C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of aluminum windows, elevations, details of all window sections, anchorage and installation details, hardware, and interface with other products. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. In addition to requirements shown or specified, comply with: Applicable provisions of AAMA Windows and Sliding Glass Doors Manual for design, materials, fabrication and installation of component parts. B. Air Infiltration Tests: Test window in accordance with ASTM E 283, at a static air pressure difference of 6.24 pdf. Air infiltration shall not exceed .30 cfm per square foot. C. Water Resistance Tests: Accordance with ASTM E 3317 ASTM E 547 at a static air pressure Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -1 difference of 10.5 psf. No water leakage. D. Uniform Load Structural Tests: Test in accordance with ASTM E 330, with high pressure applied first on one side of unit and then on the other side. 1. Operable Windows: Test with primary sash closed, secondary sash in full open position. 2. Test at static air pressure difference as specified but for operable units not less than 1.5 times design wind class used in AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. 3. At Conclusion of Test: No glass breakage; no permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms, or actuating mechanisms; no other damage which would cause window to be inoperable; permanent deformation of any frame, sash, or ventilator member not exceeding 0.04 percent of its span. E. Thermal Performance (U-Value): Test window in accordance with AAMA1503.1, (U-value) not more than .59 BTU/hr/sf/°F. F. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF): Test in accordance with AAMA 1503.1-88. CRF not less than 51. G. Forced Entry Resistance: Test in accordance with CAWM 301-90, with results as specified. H. Thermal Movements: Allow thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature. 120°F ambient temperature, 180°F surface temperature. I. Installer Qualifications: The window manufacturer or their approved representative, using mechanics that are experienced and skilled in the installation of aluminum windows of the type specified. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide written 10-year warranty signed by manufacturer that products are free of material defects. Defects are defined to include uncontrolled leakage of water, corner or joint failure, and abnormal aging or deterioration. B. Include repair or replacement of defective units for 10 years from date of completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Arcadia, Inc; 3225 East Washingtom Blvd., Vernon, CA. Tel: (323) 269-7300 Fax: (323) 269-7390. Website: http://www.arcadiainc.com. B. Substitution: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. C. Provide all aluminum windows from a single manufacturer. 2.02 WINDOWS A. Fixed Windows: Arcadia Inc., T200 Series (thermal) Heavy Commercial Fixed Windows, 2-inch depth. C-HV70 Grade. 1. Finish: Medium bronze anodized. 2. Glazing: 1-inch thick insulating glass. B. Casement Windows: Arcadia, Inc., T200 (thermal) Heavy Commercial Casement Windows, 2-inch depth. C-HC70 Grade. 1. Finish: Medium bronze anodized. 2. Glazing: 1-inch thick insulating glass. C. Horizontal Sliding Windows: Arcadia, Inc., ULT500 Series (thermal) Heavy Commercial Sliding Windows 4", HS-HC70/AW50 Grade. 1. Finish: Medium bronze anodized. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -2 2. Glazing: 1 inch thick insulating glass. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Principal Frame Members: Accurately extruded aluminum profiles of alloy 6063-T6; 0.125" minimum wall thickness. (ASTM B221 G.S. 10A-T5) 1. Natural Anodized Finish: Class II AA-C22A31 204-R1, etched and clear anodized to 0.4 mil. 2. Color Anodized Finish: Class IAA-C22A44 204-R1, anodized to 0.7 mil. B. Heavy-duty four bar hinges stainless steel only, with assymetrical end caps, and adjustable stop limits. Lock and latches cast white bronze, US-25D finish. C. Thermal Barrier: Material poured in place two-part polyurethane. D. Fluoropolymer Coating: Organic coating complying with AAMA 2604 specifications for high performance organic coatings on extrusions. E. Weatherstripping: EPDM bulb type conforming to ASTM D2000 AA515 and keyed into extruded grooves. F. Screens made of extruded aluminum frame and screened with either 18x14 aluminum or fiber mesh. G. Back glazing two-sided adhesive, 15 Ibs/ft3 density, polyethylene tape. Glazing wedges EPDM or Santoprene. H. Calking: Grade "A" type calking compound, Pecora, Tremco, Vulkem, or equal approved by Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc.; color to match color of aluminum unless otherwise approved by Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc.. I. Horizontal Sliding Window: 1. Principal Frame Members: Accurately extruded aluminum profiles of alloy 6063-T6; 0.100" minimum wall thickness for sill members and 0.072" for all other members, including frame, sash, and optional sash dividers. The aluminum shall be free of defects which impair strength and appearance. (ASTM B221 G.S. 10A-T5) a. Color Anodized Finish: Class I Medium Bronze finish, 0.7 mil thickness, meeting AAMA 607.1. 2. Component parts and accessories shall be of aluminum alloy, stainless steel or non-metallic materials which will neither deteriorate nor promote corrosion. 3. Thermal break barrier shall provide a continuous uninterrupted thermal separation around the entire perimeter of the frame and sash and shall not be bridged by any metal conductor at any point. Thermal barrier shall consist of a two-part, chemically curing, high-strength urethane. 4. Sill shall have a full-length nylon track cap. 5. Sash members shall have a minimum of 3/4" glass penetration into the aluminum to provide extra protection against "blow out" during high wind conditions. 6. Operable sash to be equipped with two stainless steel tandem ball bearings and housings. 7. Locking device to be Adams-Rite MS+1847 stainless steel mortise lock operated be a custom flush pull handle set available in either black or metallic gray powder coat. 8. Horizontal member shall have two contact points incorporating silicone treated woven pile with mylar center fins. Vertical members shall have four contact points of silicone treated woven pile with mylar center fins. All shall be held in integral extruded slots and secured to prevent movement or loss while operating sash. 9. Fixed and/or sliding sash members shall be constructed to allow for either factory or field glazing. Sash glazing shall be accomplished using a "marine" style reusable, wraparound black flexible polyvinyl chloride material per commercial standard CS230-60 without the need for separate glazing beads or putty style bedding compounds. The glazing channel Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -3 shall be provided with the unit for 1" insulating glass. 10. All assembly and installation screws shall be 18-8 or 410 stainless steel. 11. Screens made of extruded aluminum frame and screened with 18x16 fiber mesh. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate windows as two separate frames permanently interlocked by a rigid thermal barrier. 2. Frame components mitered, reinforced extruded corner key, hydraulically crimped, and "cold welded". 3. Corners: Joined neatly in a manner to provide watertight connections. 4. All ventilator extensions tubular, each corner mitered, reinforced extruded comer key, hydraulically crimped, and "cold welded". 5. Deburr and make smooth all sharp milled edges and comers. 6. Fabricate window units in a manner to facilitate replacement of worn or damaged parts, hardware, or weatherstripping. 7. Finish all exposed surfaces of aluminum windows, panning, and trim with the same finish. B. Sill Frames: Tubular sections, weeped (including weep flaps) to prevent accumulation of water in sill. C. Exterior and Interior Frame Sill: Tubular design, 5 degrees minimum slope. D. Thermal Barrier: Interlock both halves of frame, securing them together without inhibiting expansion and contraction of either part; apply bead of sealant to complete perimeter of window to seal joints between frame and thermal barrier. E. Weatherstripping: Completely weatherstrip sash, securing weatherstripping to prevent movement. All corners weather-sealed with an elastomeric sealant. F. Horizontal Sliding Windows: 1. Primary frame must be a minimum of 4" deep. 2. Frame corner joint shall be secured with two stainless steel screws and must be back caulked under the frame jambs to insure a weather-resistant seal. 3. Profile of the fixed jamb and the latching jamb shall include two weather-stripped pockets to receive the fixed and latching stiles. 4. Fixed and sliding panels shall have a nominal 1-1/2" depth and shall have overlapped joints as well as the mortise type to provide strong interlocking, mechanically fastened hairline joints. 5. Interlockers and latching stiles shall be heavy gauge tubular sections assuring precise alignment and to resiste twisting under load conditions. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install windows and related components in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's requirements. B. Erect materials plumb, level, and true relative to the building structure, maximum variation from plumb and level not exceeding 1/8 inch in 10 feet. C. Install approved insulation materials in the frame cavity on the interior portion of the window frame, area adjacent to exterior of window frame remaining uninsulated. 1. Exercise caution to avoid overlapping insulation materials across thermal barrier connectors. 2. Exercise caution to avoid bridging of the two separated frame members. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -4 D. Apply calking at all points between masonry and aluminum outer frame; apply in a manner to ensure airtight and watertight continuous perimeter seal so as to prohibit seepage of cold air into the insulated cavity. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Retain and pay for a certified testing laboratory to conduct on-site tests for air infiltration and water infiltration performance as specified. B. Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. will select two windows to be tested. C. At no additional cost to Carlsbad City Library, repair or replace window units not meeting specified performance requirements. 3.03 CLEANING A. After installation, remove all sealants, caulking, and other misplaced materials from all surfaces, including adjacent work. B. Thoroughly clean window frames, casings, and glass using materials and methods recommended by the window and glass manufacturer that do not cause defacement of work. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 -5 SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Door Hardware. 2. Storefront and entrance door hardware. 3. Digital keypad access control devices. 4. Cylinders for doors fabricated with locking hardware. 5. Key cabinets. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Finish Hardware Installation 2. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers - exterior thresholds 3. Section 08100 - Metal Doors and Frames 4. Section 08200 - Wood Doors 5. Section 08400 - Entrances and Storefronts C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere. 1. Windows. 2. Cabinets, including open wall shelving and locks. 3. Signs, except where scheduled. 4. Toilet accessories, including grab bars. 5. Installation. 6. Rough hardware. 7. Folding partitions, except cylinders where detailed. 8. Sliding aluminum doors, except cylinders where detailed. 1.2 REFERENCES: A. Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date. B. American National Standards Institute - ANS1156.18 - Materials and Finishes. C. ICC/ANSI A117.1 -1998 - Specifications for making buildings and facilities usable by physically handicapped people. D. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 E. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association F. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute G. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association 1. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows 2. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies 3. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies H. UL - Underwriters Laboratories 1. UL1OC - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware I. WHI - Warnock Hersey Incorporated State of California Building Code J. Local applicable codes K. SDI - Steel Door Institute L. WIC - Woodwork Institute of California M. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute N. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710 -1 1.3 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS A. SUBMITTALS: Submit six copies of schedule per Section 01330. Organize vertically formatted schedule into "Hardware Sets" with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include following information: 1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items. 2. Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A156.18. 3. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item. 4. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule. 6. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7. Mounting locations for hardware. 8. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing. 9. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and phone number. 10. Catalog cuts. B. Bid and submit manufacturer's updated/improved item if scheduled item is discontinued. C. Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1. Include product data and indicate benefit to the Project. Furnish operating samples on request. 1. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers have been requested by Owner to meet existing standard. D. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying schedule, wiring diagrams, manufacturers' installation, adjustment and maintenance information, and supplier's final inspection report. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications: 1. Hardware supplier: direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified architectural hardware consultant (AHC), available at reasonable times during course of work for project hardware consultation to Owner, Architect and Contractor. a) Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. B. Hardware: Free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer. C. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. D. Fire-Rated Openings: NFPA 80 compliant. Hardware UL10C / UBC Standard 7-2 (positive pressure) compliant for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved-bearing hinges, and resilient seals. Coordinate with wood door section for required intumescent seals. Furnish openings complete. 1. Note: scheduled resilient seals may exceed selected door manufacturer's requirements. 2. See 2.6.E for added information regarding resilient and intumescent seals. E. Furnish hardware items required to complete the work in accordance with specified performance level and design intent, complying with manufacturers' instructions. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-2 1. Where scheduled item is now obsolete, bid and furnish manufacturer's updated item at no additional cost to the project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HAND LING: A. Delivery: coordinate delivery to appropriate locations (shop or field). 1. Permanent keys and cores: secured delivery direct to Owner's representative. B. Acceptance at Site: Items individually packaged in manufacturers' original containers, complete with proper fasteners and related pieces. Clearly mark packages to indicate contents, locations in hardware schedule and door numbers. C. Storage: Provide securely locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, dust, excessive heat and cold, etc. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION: A. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as practical as the same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval. B. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents. Furnish related trades with the following information: 1. Location of emebedded and attached items to concrete. 2. Location of wall-mounted hardware, including wall stops. 3. Location of finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware. 4. Locations for Conduit and raceways as needed for electrical, electronic and electro-pneumatic hardware items. Fire/life-safety system interfacing. Point-to- point wiring diagrams plus riser diagrams to related trades. 5. Manufacturer templates to door and frame fabricators. C. Check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for proper hardware installation. 1.7 WARRANTY: A. Part of respective manufacturers' regular terms of sale. Provide manufacturers' written warranties: 1. Locksets: Three years. 2. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Lock Seven Years 3. Exit Devices: Three years mechanical, one One year electrical. 4. Closers: Ten years mechanical Two years electrical. 5. Hinges: One year. 6. Other Hardware: Two years. 1.8 COMMISSIONING: A. Conduct these tests prior to request for certificate of substantial completion: 1. Installer shall test door hardware operation with climate control system and stairwell pressurization system both at rest and while in full operation. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center • FINISH HARDWARE 08710-3 2. Access Control and Electrical contractor shall test electrical, electronic and electro-pneumatic hardware systems for satisfactory operation. Installer to be present at test. 3. Electrical contractor shall test hardware interfaced with fire/life-safety system for proper operation and release. Installer to be present at test. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Listed acceptable alternate manufacturers: submit for review products with equivalent function and features of scheduled products. ITEM Hinges Key System Locks Exit Devices Closers Auto Flush Bolts Coordinators Silencers Push & Pull Plates Kickplates Stops & Holders Overhead Stops Thresholds Seals & Bottoms Key Cabinets Aluminum Door Locks Signs MANUFACTURER (IVE) Ives (SCH) Schlage (SCH) Schlage (VON) Von Duprin (LCN) LCN (IVE) Ives (IVE) Ives (IVE) Ives (IVE) Ives (IVE) Ives (IVE) Ives (GLY) Glynn-Johnson (PEM) Pemko (PEM) Pemko (LUN) Lund (ADA) Adams Rite (SBH) Specialized Bldrs Hdwe 2.2 HINGING METHODS: A. Drawings typically depict doors at 90 degrees, doors will actually swing to maximum allowable. Use wide-throw conventional or continuous hinges as needed up to 8 inches in width to allow door to stand parallel to wall for true 180-degree opening. Advise architect if 8-inch width is insufficient. B. Conform to manufacturer's published hinge selection standard for door dimensions, weight and frequency, and to hinge selection as scheduled. Where manufacturer's standard exceeds the scheduled product, furnish the heavier of the two choices, notify Architect of deviation from scheduled hardware. C. Conventional Hinges: Steel or stainless steel pins and concealed bearings. Hinge open widths minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing. 1. Outswinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP) pins and security studs. 2. Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive atmospheric Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-4 conditions. 2.3 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS: A. Mortise Locksets and Latchsets: as scheduled. 1. Chassis: cold-rolled steel, handing field-changeable without disassembly. 2. Latch bolts: 3/4 inch throw stainless steel anti-friction type. 3. Lever Trim: through-bolted, accessible design, cast lever or solid extruded bar type levers as scheduled. Filled hollow tube design unacceptable. a) Spindles: security design independent breakaway. Breakage of outside lever does not allow access to inside lever's hubworks to gain wrongful entry. 4. Thumbturns: accessible design not requiring pinching or twisting motions to operate. 5. Deadbolts: stainless steel 1-inch throw. 6. Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty solenoid. 7. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1 inch deep box construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing. 8. Scheduled Lock Series and Design: Schlage L series, 17A design. 9. Certifications: a) ANSI A156.13,1994, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security. b) ANSI/ASTM F476-84 Grade 31 UL Listed. B. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: as scheduled. 1. Chassis: cylindrical design, corrosion-resistant plated cold-rolled steel, through- bolted. 2. Locking Spindle: stainless steel, integrated spring and spindle design. 3. Latch Retractors: forged steel. Balance of inner parts: corrosion-resistant plated steel, or stainless steel. 4. Latchbolt: solid steel. 5. Backset: 2-3/4" typically, more or less as needed to accommodate frame, door or other hardware. 6. Lever Trim: accessible design, independent operation, spring-cage supported, minimum 2" clearance from lever mid-point to door face. 7. Electric operation: Manufacturer-installed continuous duty solenoid. 8. Strikes: 16 gage curved steel, bronze or brass with 1" deep box construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing. 9. Lock Series and Design: Schlage D series, "Sparta" design. 10. Certifications: a) ANSI A156.2,1994, Series 4000, Grade 1. b) UL listed for A label and lesser class single doors up to 4ft x 8ft. 2.4 EXIT DEVICES / PANIC HARDWARE A. General features: 1. Independent lab-tested 1,000,000 cycles. 2. Push-through push-pad design. No exposed push-pad fasteners, no exposed cavities when operated. Return stroke fluid dampeners and rubber bottoming dampeners, plus anti-rattle devices. 3. 0.75-inch throw deadlocking latch bolts. 4. End caps: impact-resistant, flush-mounted. No raised edges or lips to catch carts or other equipment. 5. No exposed screws to show through glass doors. 6. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions, no extra parts required to effect change of function. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-5 7. Releasable in normal operation with 15-lb. maximum operating force per UBC Standard 10-4, and with 32 Ib. maximum pressure under 250-lb. load to the door. 8. Flush end cap design as opposed to typical "bottle-cap" design end cap. 9. Comply with CBC Section 1003.3.1.9. B. Specific features: 1. Non-Fire Rated Devices: cylinder dogging. 2.5 CLOSERS A. Surface Closers: 4041 1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome- silicon steel spring. 2. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code. 3. Independent lab-tested 10,000,000 cycles. 4. Non-sized, non-handed, and adjustable. Place closer inside building, stairs, and rooms. 5. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware. 6. Adjustable to open with not more than S.OIbs pressure to open at exterior doors and S.OIbs at interior doors. As allowed per California Building Code, Section 1133B.2.5, local authority may increase the allowable pressure for fire doors to achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15lbs. 7. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled. 8. Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units. 9. Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test, furnish data on request. 10. Exterior doors do not require seasonal adjustments in temperatures from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F, furnish data on request. 11. Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires. 12. Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) not permitted. B. Overhead Concealed Closers: Power transmitted to door separately from hanging means. Closer spindle does not support the door. Cast iron cylinders with hydraulically checked rack and pinion construction and single piece forged pistons. Separate non- critical sweep and latch speed valves. 1. 2030 concealed in 1-3/4inch x 4inch tube, single-lever arm & track power transmission, concealed-in-track bumpers where scheduled, where scheduled, independent latch and power adjustment valves for either direction of swing. 2.6 OTHER HARDWARE A. Automatic Flush Bolts: Low operating force design. B. Overhead Stops: Non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field- changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions. C. Kick Plates: Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as scheduled. Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware. D. Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware. 1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide wall type with appropriate fasteners. Where wall type cannot be used, provide floor type. If neither can be Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-6 used, provide overhead type. 2. Locate overhead stops for maximum possible opening. Consult with Owner for furniture locations. Minimum: 90deg stop / 95deg deadstop. Note degree of opening in submittal. E. Seals: Finished to match adjacent frame color. Resilient seal material: polypropylene, nylon brush, or solid high-grade neoprene. UL label applied to seals on rated doors. Substitute products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material's thickness and durability. 1. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval. 2. Solid neoprene: MIL Spec. R6855-CL III, Grade 40. 3. Non-corroding fasteners at in-swinging exterior doors. 4. Sound control openings: Use components tested as a system using nationally accepted standards by independent laboratories. Ensure that the door leafs have the necessary sealed-in-place STC ratings. Adhesive mounted components not acceptable. Fasten applied seals over bead of sealant. 5. Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C / UBC Standard 7-2 compliant. Coordinate with selected door manufacturers' and selected frame manufacturers' requirements. Where rigid housed resilient seals are scheduled in this section and the selected door manufacturer only requires an adhesive-mounted resilient seal, furnish rigid housed seal at minimum, or both the rigid housed seal plus the adhesive applied seal. Adhesive applied seals alone are deemed insufficient for this project where rigid housed seals are scheduled. 6. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected door manufacturer. Furnish fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full compliance with UL10C/ UBC Standard 7-2. Where required, intumescent seals vary in requirement by door type and door manufacture - careful coordination required. Adhesive-applied intumescent strips are not acceptable, use concealed-in-door- edge type or kerfed-in-frame type. F. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details. Comply with CBC Section 1133B.2.4.1. Substitute products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material's thickness. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval. 1. Exteriors: Seal perimeter to exclude water and vermin. Use butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene sealant complying with requirements in Divisbn 7 'Thermal and Moisture Protection". Non-ferrous 1/4inch fasteners and lead expansion shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or approved equivalent) Flat Head Sleeve Anchors (SS/FHSL). 2. Fire-rated openings, 90min or less duration: use thresholds to interrupt floor covering material under the door where that material has a critical radiant flux value less than 0.22 watts per square centimeter, per NFPA 253. Use threshold unit as scheduled. If none scheduled, request direction from Architect. 3. Fire-rated openings, Shour duration: Thresholds, where scheduled, to extend full jamb depth. 4. Acoustic openings: Set units in full bed of Division-7-compliant butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene sealant, leave no air space between threshold and substrate. 5. Plastic plugs with wood or sheet metal screws are not an acceptable substitute for specified fastening methods. G. Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive. Pinned TORX drive at high security areas. Flat head sleeve anchors (FHSL) may be slotted drive. Sheet metal and wood screws: full-thread. Sleeve nuts: full length to prevent door compression. H. Silencers: Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors. Omit Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-7 where adhesive mounted seal occurs. Leave no unfilled/uncovered pre-punched silencer holes. 2.7 FINISH: A. Generally BHMA 626 Satin Chromium. 1. Areas using BHMA 626 to have push-plates, pulls and protection plates of BHMA 630, Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise noted. B. Door closers: factory powder coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted. C. Aluminum items: match predominant adjacent material. Seals to coordinate with frame color. 2.8 KEYING REQUIREMENTS: A. Key System: Schlage Everest utility-patented keyway, interchangeable core. Utility patent protection to extend at least until 2014. Key blanks available only from factory- direct sources, not available from after-market key blank manufacturers. For estimate use factory GMK charge. Initiate and conduct meeting(s) with Owner and I-R Security & Safety Consultants representatives to determine system keyway(s), keybow styles, structure and degree of geographic exclusivity. Furnish Owner's written approval of the system. Owner will order and supply permanent cylinders/cores. Owner/Contractor will install permanent cylinders/cores. 1. Existing factory registered master key system. 2. Construction keying: furnish temporary keyed-alike cores. Remove at substantial completion and install permanent cylinders/cores in Owner's presence. Demonstrate that construction key no longer operates. 3. Furnish 10 construction keys. 4. Furnish 2 construction control keys. B. Key Cylinders: furnish utility patented, 6-pin solid brass construction. C. Cylinder cores: furnish keyed at factory of lock manufacturer where permanent records are maintained. Locks and cylinders same manufacturer. D. Permanent keys: use secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner. 1. For estimate: 3 keys per change combination, 5 master keys per group, 5 grand- master keys, 3 control keys. E. Bitting List: use secured shipment direct from point of origination to Owner upon completion. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS: A. Installer to meet with the manufacturers representatives of the locks, closers and exit devices prior to commencement of any installation for instruction on proper installation and adjustment. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation. B. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and security codes. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-8 1. Notify Architect of any code conflicts before ordering material. 2. Locate levers, key cylinders, t-turn pieces, touchbars and other operable portions of latching hardware between 30 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor, per CBC Section 1133B.2.5.1. 3. Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware scheduled to remain, match locations of existing hardware. C. Overhead stops: before installing, determine proposed locations of furniture items, fixtures, and other items to be protected by the overhead stop's action. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to tine and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and operation. Remove and reinstall or replace work deemed defective by Architect. 1. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes, etc; fasten hardware over and through these seals. Install sweeps across bottoms of doors before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom pivots, trim astragals to tops of sweeps. 2. When hardware is to be attached to existing metal surface and insufficient reinforcement exists, use RivNuts, NutSerts or similar anchoring device for screws. 3. Use manufacturers' fasteners furnished with hardware items, or submit Request for Substitution with Architect. 4. Replace fasteners damaged by power-driven tools. 6. Locate floor stops no more that 4 inches from walls and not within paths of travel. See paragraph 2.2 regarding hinge widths, door should be well clear of point of wall reveal. Point of door contact no closer to the hinge edge than half the door width. Where situation is questionable or difficult, contact Architect for direction. C. Core concrete for exterior door stop anchors. Set anchors in approved non-shrink grout. D. Locate overhead stops for minimum 90 degrees and maximum allowable degree of swing. E. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames. F. Lubricate and adjust existing hardware scheduled to remain. Carefully remove and give to Owner items not scheduled for reuse. 3.4. ADJUSTING A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. 1. Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods to be repaired or replaced to Owner's satisfaction. 2. Adjust doors to fully latch with no more than 1 pound of pressure. 3. Adjust delayed-action closers on fire-rated doors to fully close from fully-opened position in no more than 10 seconds. B. Inspection: Use hardware supplier. Include supplier's report with closeout documents. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-9 C. Final inspection: Installer to provide letter to Owner that upon completion installer has visited the Project and accomplished the following: 1. Re-adjust hardware. 2. Evaluate maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and instruct Owner's personnel. 3. Identify items that have deteriorated or failed. 4. Submit written report identifying problems 3.5 DEMONSTRATION: A. Demonstrate mechanical hardware and electrical, electronic and pneumatic hardware systems, including adjustment and maintenance procedures. 3.6 PROTECTION/CLEANING: A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows, etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion. B. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation/reinstallation process. 3.7 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE A. See door schedule in drawings for hardware set assignments. HWSET:01 6 EA HINGE 3CB1HW4.5 X4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD3547A-EO 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD3547A-NL-OP X 388 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 3 EA CORE ONLY 23-030 626 SCH 2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 30-008-1-1/4" 626 SCH 2 EA OFFSET DOOR PULL 8190-0 630 IVE 2 EA CONCEALED CLOSER 2030 689 LCN 2 EA SECURITY FLOOR FS18S BLK IVE STOP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER SILL DETAIL PEM WEATHERSTRIPPING AT HEAD, JAMBS, DOOR BOTTOMS AND MEETING STILES BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. HW SET: 02 3 EA HINGE 3CB1HW4.5 X4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE CD35A-NL-OP X 388 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 2 EA CORE ONLY 23-030 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 30-008-1-1/4" 626 SCH 1 EA OFFSET DOOR PULL 8190-0 630 IVE 1 EA CONCEALED CLOSER 2030 689 LCN 1 EA SECURITY FLOOR FS18S BLK IVE STOP 1 EA THRESHOLD PER SILL DETAIL PEM Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-10 WEATHERSTRIPPING AT HEAD, JAMBS AND DOOR BOTTOM BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. HW SET: 03 6 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 EA EA EA EA EA EA SET EA EA HINGE INDICATOR LEVER DEADLOCK ARMORED TRIM STRIKE CORE ONLY MORTISE CYLINDER PULL/PUSHBAR 3CB1HW4.5X4.5NRP 4550 MS1851S-3PT - ADVISE BACKSET MS4002 23-030 30-008 -1-1/4" 9190-0 (BACK TO BACK) 1 EA CONCEALED CLOSER 2030 SECURITY FLOOR FS18S STOP THRESHOLD PER SILL DETAIL 630 IVE 689 ADA 628 ADA 628 ADA 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 IVE 689 LCN BLK IVE PEM WEATHERSTRIPPING AT HEAD, JAMBS, DOOR BOTTOMS AND MEETING STILES BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. HW SET: 04 3 EA HINGE 1 EA INDICATOR LEVER 1 EA DEADLOCK 1 EA ARMORED TRIM STRIKE 1 EA CORE ONLY 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 1 SET PULL/PUSHBAR 1 EA CONCEALED CLOSER 1 EA SECURITY FLOOR STOP 1 EA THRESHOLD 3CB1HW4.5X4.5NRP 4550 MS1850S - ADVISE BACKSET MS4002 23-030 30-008-1-1/4" 9190-0 (BACK TO BACK) 2030 FS18S PER SILL DETAIL 630 IVE 689 ADA 628 ADA 628 ADA 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 IVE 689 LCN BLK IVE PEM WEATHERSTRIPPING AT HEAD, JAMBS AND DOOR BOTTOM BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. HWSET:05 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 EA SET EA EA EA EA EA EA SET EA EA HINGE CONST LATCHING BOLT DUST PROOF STRIKE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY COORDINATOR ASTRAGAL SURFACE CLOSER SEALS DOOR SWEEP THRESHOLD 3CB1HW4.5X4.5NRP FB51P DP2 L9480R17A 23-030 COR X FL X MB 357SP P4041 H-CUSH S88W (HEAD & JAMBS) 315CN PER SILL DETAIL 630 630 626 626 626 600 689 AL IVE IVE IVE SCH SCH IVE PEM LCN PEM PEM PEM Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-11 HWSET06 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 EA SET EA EA EA EA EA EA SET EA EA HINGE CONST LATCHING BOLT DUST PROOF STRIKE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY COORDINATOR ASTRAGAL SURFACE CLOSER SEALS DOOR SWEEP THRESHOLD 3CB14.5X4.5NRP FB51P DP2 L9480R17A 23-030 COR X FL X MB 357SP P4041 H-CUSH S88W (HEAD & JAMBS) 315CN PER SILL DETAIL 630 IVE 630 IVE 626 IVE 626 SCH 626 SCH 600 IVE PEM 689 LCN PEM AL PEM PEM HWSET:07 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EA EA EA EA EA SET EA EA HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY LOCK GUARD SURFACE CLOSER SEALS DOOR SHOE THRESHOLD 3CB14.5X4.5NRP L9480R17A 23-030 LG1 P4041 H-CUSH S88W (HEAD & JAMBS) 2221AV PER SILL DETAIL 630 IVE 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 IVE 689 LCN PEM AL PEM PEM HW SET: 08 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EA EA EA EA EA SET EA EA HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY LOCK GUARD SURFACE CLOSER SEALS DOOR BOTTOM THRESHOLD 3CB14.5X4.5NRP L9480R17A 23-030 LG1 P4041 H-CUSH S88W (HEAD & JAMBS) 420ASL PER SILL DETAIL 630 IVE 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 IVE 689 LCN PEM AL PEM PEM HWSET:09 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EA EA EA EA EA SET EA EA EA HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY LOCK GUARD OVERHEAD HOLDER SEALS DOOR SHOE RAIN DRIP THRESHOLD 3CB14.5X4.5NRP L9480R17A 23-030 LG1 900H S88W (HEAD & JAMBS) 2221AV 346C PER SILL DETAIL 630 IVE 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 IVE 689 GLY PEM AL PEM AL PEM PEM Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-12 HWSET: 10 3 EA HINGE 1 EA DEADLATCH 1 EA CORE ONLY 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 1 EA KING COBRA TRIM 1 EA LEVER HANDLES HWSET: 11 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5 4710-ADVISE BACKSET 23-030 30-008 -1-1/4" KC9111 4569 1 EA CONCEALED CLOSER 2030 1 EA WALL STOP WS407CCV HINGE DEADLATCH CORE ONLY MORTISE CYLINDER KING COBRA TRIM LEVER HANDLES CONCEALED CLOSER 2030 DOME STOP FS436 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5 4710-ADVISE BACKSET 23-030 30-008 -1-1/4" KC9111 4569 652 IVE 628 ADA 626 SCH 626 SCH 626 LOG 628 ADA 689 LCN 630 IVE 652 IVE 628 ADA 626 SCH 626 SCH 626 LOG 628 ADA 689 LCN 626 IVE HWSET: 12 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EA EA EA EA EA EA SET EA EA HWSET: 13 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EA EA EA EA EA EA SET EA EA HINGE INDICATOR LEVER DEADLOCK CORE ONLY MORTISE CYLINDER STRIKE PULL/PUSHBAR CONCEALED CLOSER 2030 WALL STOP WS407CCV 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5 4550 MS1850S - ADVISE BACKSET 23-030 30-008-1-1/4" MS4001 9190-0 (BACK TO BACK) 652 IVE 689 ADA 628 ADA 626 SCH 626 SCH 628 ADA 630 IVE 689 LCN 630 IVE HINGE INDICATOR LEVER DEADLOCK CORE ONLY MORTISE CYLINDER STRIKE PULL/PUSHBAR SURFACE CLOSER OVERHEAD STOP 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5 4550 MS1850S - ADVISE BACKSET 23-030 30-008 - 1-1/4" MS4001 9190-0 (BACK TO BACK) 4041 DELX18TJ 41 OS 652 IVE 689 ADA 628 ADA 626 SCH 626 SCH 628 ADA 630 IVE 689 LCN 652 GLY Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-13 HWSET14 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 3 EA HWSET.15 3 EA 1 SET 1 EA 1 EA HWSET:16 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 3 EA 1 EA HWSET17 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 3 EA 1 EA HWSET:18 3 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA 1 EA HINGE CORE ONLY ACCESS CONTROL LOCK SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE WALL STOP SILENCER HINGE PULL/PUSHBAR CONCEALED CLOSER WALL STOP HINGE PUSH PLATE PULL PLATE SURFACE CLOSER OVERHEAD STOP KICK PLATE SILENCER WOMEN RESTROOM SIGN HINGE PUSH PLATE PULL PLATE SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE WALL STOP SILENCER 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5 23-030 PRO5196-LFS17 4041 DEL-SNB 840010"X2"LDW WS407CCV SR65 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5 9190-0 (BACK TO BACK) 2030 WS407CCV 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5 8200 8" X 16" 8303-8 4" X 16" 4041 DEL-SNB 450S 840010"X2"LDW SR65 SBH12W 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5 8200 8" X 16" 8303-8 4" X 16" 4041 DEL-SNB 840010"X2"LDW WS407CCV SR65 MEN RESTROOM SIGNSBH12M HINGE PUSH PLATE PULL PLATE SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE 3CB1HW 4.5X4.5 8200 8" X 16" 8303-8 4" X 16" P4041 SPRING CUSH-DEL-SNB 840010"X2"LDW 652 IVE 626 SCH 626 LOG 689 LCN 630 IVE 630 IVE GRY IVE 652 IVE 630 IVE 689 LCN 630 IVE 652 630 630 689 652 630 GRY BLU 652 630 630 689 630 630 GRY BLU 652 630 630 689 630 IVE IVE IVE LCN GLY IVE IVE SBH IVE IVE IVE LCN IVE IVE IVE SBH IVE IVE IVE LCN IVE Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-14 3 EA SILENCER SR65 1 EA WOMEN RESTROOM SBH12W SIGN GRY IVE BLU SBH HWSET:19 3 1 1 1 3 EA EA EA EA EA HW SET: 20 3 1 1 1 3 EA EA EA EA EA HINGE ENTRANCE LOCK CORE ONLY OVERHEAD STOP SILENCER HINGE CLASSROOM LOCK CORE ONLY WALL STOP SILENCER 3PB1 4.5X4.5 ND53RD SPA 23-030 450S SR65 3PB1 4.5X4.5 ND70RD SPA 23-030 WS407CCV SR65 652 IVE 626 SCH 626 SCH 652 GLY GRY IVE 652 IVE 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 IVE GRY IVE HW SET: 21 3 1 1 1 3 EA EA EA EA EA HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY WALL STOP SILENCER 3PB1 4.5X4.5 ND80RD SPA 23-030 WS407CCV SR64 652 IVE 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 IVE GRY IVE HW SET: 22 3 1 1 1 3 EA EA EA EA EA HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY OVERHEAD STOP SILENCER 3PB1 4.5X4.5 ND80RD SPA 23-030 450S SR64 652 IVE 626 SCH 626 SCH 652 GLY GRY IVE HWSET:23 3 1 1 1 3 EA EA EA EA EA HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY WALL STOP SILENCER 3PB1 4.5X4.5 ND80RD SPA 23-030 WS407CCV SR65 652 IVE 626 SCH 626 SCH 630 IVE GRY IVE HWSET:24 3 1 1 EA EA EA HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY 3PB1 4.5X4.5 ND80RD SPA 23-030 652 IVE 626 SCH 626 SCH Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-15 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 3 EA SILENCER HW SET: 25 3 1 1 3 1 EA EA EA EA EA HW SET: 26 HINGE PRIVACY SET WALL STOP SILENCER UNISEX RESTROOM SIGN 3 EA HINGE 1 EA PASSAGE SET 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 3 EA SILENCER 450S SR65 3PB1 4.5X4.5 ND40S SPA WS407CCV SR65 SBH12U 3PB1 4.5X4.5 ND10SSPA 450S SR65 652 GLY GRY IVE 652 IVE 626 SCH 630 IVE GRY IVE BLU SBH 652 IVE 626 SCH 652 GLY GRY IVE HW SET: 27 1 SET TRACK & HARDWARE 9130-72 X 9113 STOPS 2 EA DOOR PULL 8102-6 (BACK TO BACK) HAG 630 IVE HWSET:28 PAIR SLIDING ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER HW SET: 29 ACCORDIAN DOOR HWSET:30 FOLDING PARTITION ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER END OF SECTION 08710 Carlsbad City Library Learning Center FINISH HARDWARE 08710-16 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07260 - Vapor Retarders. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material. C. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites. D. Section 08305 - Sliding Glass Doors. E. Section 08410 - Metal-Framed Storefronts. F. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows: Glazed windows. G. Section 08830 - Mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2004. C. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 1999 (Reapproved 2005). D. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2002. E. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2001. F. ASTM C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2003. G. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005. H. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. I. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1996. J. ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units; 2001. K. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units; 1997. L. ASTM E 1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2004. M. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2004. N. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1990. O. GANA (LGDG) - Laminated Glass Reference Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2003. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GLAZING 08800 -1 P. SIGMA TM-3000 - Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units; Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association; 2004. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. 2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier and vapor retarder seal. 3. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Select type and thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with 2001 California Building code. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Test in accordance with ASTM E 330. 3. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 4. Thicknesses listed are minimum. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size of glass units, showing coloration and design. E. Samples: Submit 3 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected. F. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that sealed insulated glass meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.09 WARRANTY Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GLAZING 08800 -2 A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. C. Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Visteon Glass Systems: www.visteon.com/floatglass. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. B. Clear Float Glass (Type GL1): Clear, annealed. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch. C. Clear Float Glass (Type GL2): Clear, fully tempered. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1048, Condition A uncoated, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1, Quality q3 glazing select. 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch. D. Safety Glass (Type GL3): Clean heat strengthened. 1. Laminated with 0.060 inch thick plastic interlayer; comply with ASTM C 1172 2. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. 3. Comply with ASTM C 1048, Condition A uncoated, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1, Quality q3 glazing select. 4. Comply with ANSI Z97.1. 5. Thickness: 1/2 inch. E. Tinted Glass (Type GL4): Float type, heat strengthened, 'Versalux Green 2000" color. 1. Light transmittance of 66 percent, shading coefficient of 0.60. 2. SHGC: 0.51 3. Low E coating on No. 2 surface, Viracon VE2-2M' or equal. 4. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 2, Quality Q3 (glazing select). 5. Thickness: 1/4 inch. F. Tinted Glass (Type GL5): Float type, tempered, heat-absorbing and light reducing in 'Versalux Green 2000" color. 1. Light transmittance of 66 percent, shading coefficient of 0.60. 2. SHGC: 0.51 3. Low E coating on No. 2 surface, Viracon VE2-2M' or equal. 4. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 2 tinted heat-absorbing and light reducing, Quality q3 glazing select. 5. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2.02 SEALED INSULATING GLASS (MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. B. Insulated Glass Units (Type GL6): Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal. 1. Outer pane of GL4 glass, inner pane of GL1 glass. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GLAZING 2. Place low E coating on No.2 surface within the unit. 3. Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773, Class CBA. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 5. Total unit thickness of 1 inch. 6. Based on Viracon VE2-2M1. 7. SHGC: 0.31 8. Summer U-Value: 0.26 9. Light Transmittance: 65% C. Insulated Glass Units (Type GL7): Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal. 1. Outer pane of GL5 glass, inner pane of GL2 glass. 2. Place low E coating on No.2 surface within the unit. 3. Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773, Class CBA. 4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 5. Total unit thickness of 1 inch. 6. Based on 'Viracon VE2-2M'. 7. SHGC: 0.31 8. Summer U-Value: 0.26 9. Light Transmittance: 65% D. Edge Seal Construction: Aluminum, bent and soldered comers. 2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Butyl Sealant: Single component; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning. B. Silicone Sealant: Single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. 2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color. D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C 864 Option I; black color. E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. F. Glass Safety Film: 1. 400 ft. Ib. impact level when tested in accordance with the Safety Glazing Standard CPSC 16CFR. 2. 99% ultraviolet ray blocking. 3. Clear. 4. Multiple microlayer 5. Abrasion resistant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GLAZING 08800 -4 A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual. E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GLAZING 08800 -5 SECTION 08830 MIRRORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass mirrors. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 10800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Metal-framed mirrors. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2004. B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2002. C. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2001. D. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005. E. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2004. F. GANA (TIPS) - Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors; National Association of Mirror Manufacturers; 2004. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Limit mirrored glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that mirrors, meets or exceeds specified requirements. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Carlsbad City Library's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.08 WARRANTY Carlsbad City Library Learning Center MIRRORS 08830 -1 A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Mirrors: 1. BinswangerMirror/ACI Distribution: www.binswangermirror.com. 2. Carolina Mirror Co. 3. Lenoir Mirror Co: www.lenoirmirror.com. 4. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q1 (mirror select); 6 mm minimum thick. 1. Sizes noted on Drawings. 2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. B. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel J-profile channels. C. Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive mirrors. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. C. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193 for solvent release sealants. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations. B. Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion. C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes. D. Frameless Mirrors: Set mirrors with adhesive, applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. Provide continuous channel support and clips at top of mirrors. Anchor channels and clips rigidly to wall construction. 3.04 CLEANING Carlsbad City Library Learning Center MIRRORS 08830 -2 A. Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center MIRRORS 08830 -3 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Metal channel ceiling framing. C. Shaft wall system. D. Cementitious backer board. E. Gypsum wallboard. F. Glass mat faced gypsum board. G. Joint treatment and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 1999. B. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999. C. ASTM C 36/C 36M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard; 2001. D. ASTM C 79/C 79M - Standard Specification for Treated Core and Nontreated Core Gypsum Sheathing Board; 2001. E. ASTM C 442 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard. F. ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2002. G. ASTM C 630/C 630M - Standard Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board; 2000. H. ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2004a. I. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2004. J. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2004a. K. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2004. L. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2004. M. ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2000. N. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. O. GA-201 - Using Gypsum Board for Walls & Ceilings; Gypsum Association; 1990. P. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2004. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 -1 Q. GA-226 - Application of Gypsum Board to Form Curved Surfaces; Gypsum Association; 1996. R. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2003. S. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated assemblies. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Gypsum Board: 1. G-P Gypsum Corp. 2. National Gypsum Co. 3. United States Gypsum Co. 4. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of U240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs. 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Ceiling Channels: C shaped. 4. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. B. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 and specified performance requirements. C. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C 754 for spacing required. 2.03 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Type X: Fire resistant, UL or WH rated. 1. Application: Where required for fire-rated assemblies, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. B. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; ends square cut. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: where directed. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 4. Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Shaftwall or Coreboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; Type X core; sizes to minimize joints in place; 1 inch thick; square, tongue and groove, or double beveled edges, ends square cut. 2.04 FIBERGLASS FACED BOARD MATERIALS A. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9, aggregated Portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces, 1/2 inch thick. B. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board: Gypsum panels with moisture-resistant core and coated inorganic fiberglass mat back surface designed to resist growth of mold and mildew, per ASTM D 3273. 1. Product: DensDeck Roof Board manufactured by G-P Gypsum, a Georgia Pacific company. 2. Standard Type: Thickness 1/2 inch. 3. Flame Spread: 4. Mold 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: As specified in Section 07212. B. Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 07900. C. Corner Beads: Galvanized steel. D. Trim: ASTM C 840; Bead type as detailed. E. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. 3. Chemical hardening type compound. F. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type. G. Reveals: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063 T5 with chemical conversion coating. H. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. 3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION A. Shaft Wall Framing: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special friction studs. 1. Seal perimeter of shaft wall and penetrations with acoustical sealant. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Comply with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members at 24 inches on center. 1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200. 2. Laterally brace entire suspension system. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift. C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center. 1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations. 2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Extend stud framing to ceiling where indicated. Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling framing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Extend stud framing through ceiling to structure above only where indicated. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners. D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs. E. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 16 inches on center. 1. Orientation: Horizontal. F. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures and toilet partitions. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. 3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members. 2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. 3. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes. 3.05 GYPSUM BOARD AND GLASS MAT FACED BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board parallel to framing, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Single-Layer Fire-Rated: Install gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. D. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of listing authority. E. Gypsum Soffit Board: Install perpendicular to framing, with staggered end joints over framing members or other solid backing. F. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members where indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions. G. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board. I. Curved Surfaces: Apply gypsum board to curved substrates in accordance with GA-226. J. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 3.07 JOINT TREATMENT A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound. B. Finish all gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840 Level 5. C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. D. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer. E. Finish: Smooth 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 3.09 FINISH A. Smooth, flat finish END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09383 SLATE TILE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Slate flooring. B. Setting materials, grouts, and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108.10 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999. B. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2004. C. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2004a. D. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2004. E. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2004a. F. ASTM C 629 - Standard Specification for Slate Dimension Stone; 2003. G. ASTM C 1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method; 1996. H. TCA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of America, Inc.; 2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions, Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's instructions for using grout. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of floor, stone patterns, perimeter conditions, control and expansion joints, and setting details. D. Verification Samples: Sets of three pieces of slate, not less than 6 inches square, illustrating finished texture and full range of color to be anticipated in completed work. E. Maintenance Data: Recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, polishes and waxes. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing slate flooring of the type specified in this section, with not fewer than three years of documented experience. B. Pre-lnstallation Meeting: Convene at project site not less than one week prior to commencing slate flooring installation, with attendance by all affected parties. Review installation procedures and coordination requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle slate to prevent chipping, breakage, soiling, or other damage. B. Protect edges of slate with wood or other rigid materials. C. Place and stack skids and slate flooring units to distribute weight evenly and to prevent breakage or cracking. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SLATE TILE 09383 -1 A. Provide sufficient heat and ventilation in areas where slate flooring installation is being performed to assure proper setting. 1. Take precautionary methods as necessary to prevent excessive temperature changes during installation. 2. Maintain environmental conditions for not less than 7 days after installation. 1.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide not less than 10 square ft of each size and color of slate flooring installed, for Carlsbad City Library's use in maintenance. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide slate as furnished by Echeguren Slate, Inc.; 1495 Illinois Street; San Francisco, CA 94107. ASD. Tel: (415) 206-9343. Fax: (415) 206-9353. www.echeguren.com. B. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4.1-6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 SLATE A. Slate - General Requirements: 1. Comply with ASTM C 629, Classification I - Exterior. 2. Texture: Fine, even grain with minimum 0.60 coefficient of friction when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1028. 2.03 ADHESIVE, GROUT, AND MORTAR MATERIALS A. Mortar Bed Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II. 2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 3. Aggregate: ASTM C 144. B. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: 2.04 MIXES A. Portland Cement and Lime Setting Mortar Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N for interior and Type S for exterior locations. B. Joint Grout: Comply with mixing requirements of referenced ANSI standard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates are ready to receive slate flooring work. Do not proceed with installation until substrate conditions are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Vacuum clean substrate to remove dirt, dust, and debris. B. Clean slate surfaces that have become soiled or stained, using only mild cleaning compounds that do not leave residue. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Quality Standard: Perform work in accordance with TCA Handbook instructions for installation methods specified. B. Lay stone in patterns indicated, maintaining uniform joint widths. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SLATE TILE 09383 -2 C. Use power saws to cut stone. Scribe and field-cut stone to fit at obstructions. D. Keep expansion and control joints free of mortar or grout. E. Sound test units after installation for complete bond. Replace units that sound hollow. 3.04 MORTAR BED INSTALLATION 3.05 GROUTING AND SEALING A. Allow slate flooring to set for a minimum of 48 hours before grouting and sealing. B. Install grout in slate flooring joints to comply with ANSI A108.10 and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Cure grout by maintaining in damp condition for not less than 7 days, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. D. Install joint sealer at expansion and control joints, at penetrations, and as otherwise indicated. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean slate flooring after setting, grouting, and sealing have been completed, using methods and materials as recommended by slate distributor. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic over slate flooring for a minimum of 72 hours after installation. B. Protect slate flooring during construction with heavy nonstaining kraft paper. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SLATE TILE SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16821 - Public Address and Music Equipment: Speakers in ceiling system. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2004. B. ASTM C 636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2004. C. ASTM E 580 - Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint; 2002. D. ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 1998. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other ceiling finishes, and mechanical and electrical items installed in the ceiling. C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components. D. Samples: Submit two samples 6x6 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. E. Samples: Submit two samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 5 percent of total acoustical unit area of each type of acoustical unit for Carlsbad City Library's use in maintenance of project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. B. Acoustical Panels Type OPTIMA • Open Plan: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 1 inches. 3. Composition: Fiberglass with DuraBrite acoustically transparent membrane. 4. Density: 1.0lb/cuft. 5. Light Reflectance: 0.90 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 6. NRC Range: 0.95 to 0.95, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 7. Articulation Class (AC): 190, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 8. Edge: Access-Kerf Beveled Tegular edge, g. Surface Color: Color as selected. 10. Surface Pattern: DuraBrite with factory-applied acrylic latex paint. 11. Suspension System: Exposed grid. C. Metal-Faced Acoustical Panels Type METALWORKS - Vector: Electrogalvanized steel, micro-perforated flat formed sheet, with acoustical fleece acoustical media backing; with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24x24 inches. 2. Thickness of Metal: inch. 3. Light Reflectance: 0.61 percent, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 4. NRC Range: 0.65 to 0.90, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264. 5. Panel Edge: Square. 6. Surface Pattern: micro-perforated. 7. Surface Color: Color as selected. 8. Suspension System: Exposed grid. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Manufacturers: 1. Same as for acoustical units. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. B. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required. C. Exposed Steel Suspension System Type Suprafine: Formed galvanized steel, commercial quality cold rolled; Intermediate-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 9/16 inch wide face. Use with OPTIMA- Open Plan panel system. 2. Construction: Single web. 3. Finish: Painted, color as selected. D. Exposed Steel Suspension System Type Prelude: Formed galvanized steel, commercial quality cold rolled; Intermediate-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. Use with METALWORKS - Vector panel system. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 2. Construction: Single web. 3. Finish: Painted, color as selected. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. C. Gypsum Board: Fire rated type; 5/8 inch thick, ends and edges square, paper faced. D. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION- SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Provide hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. F. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. I. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. J. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. K. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Overlap and rivet corners. L. Install light fixture boxes constructed of gypsum board above light fixtures in accordance with fire rated assembly requirements and light fixture ventilation requirements. 3.03 INSTALLATION-ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 -3 B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Lay directional patterned units as indicated on Reflected Ceiling Plan sheets. D. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. E. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. F. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. G. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim. 2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges. H. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding. I. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS SECTION 09615 WATER VAPOR CONTROL AND FLOOR SEALER PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete floor sealer at exposed concrete floor slab. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09300 - Ceramic Tile. B. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring: Resilient tile and sheet flooring. C. Section 09684 - Carpet Tile. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 156 - Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials; 2003. B. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2003. C. ASTM D 1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes; 2002. D. ASTM D 4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers; 2002. E. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000. F. ASTM F 1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 1998. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Manufacturer's Specification. 2. Installation Instructions. 3. Independent Test Data. 4. Certification Requirements. 5. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 6. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 7. Warranty Information. C. Submit independent lab test reports documenting performance per the following: 1. Water Vapor Transmission (dry and wet methods): Performance shall be documented by an independent testing laboratory at a minimum of 95%, water vapor transmission reduction compared to untreated ACI Committee 201 durable concrete, as tested in accordance with ASTM E 96.. 2. Adhesion Properties: After ASTM E 96 wet method testing, minimum of 375 psi tensile stress, with cohesive failure in the substrate, as tested in accordance with ASTM D 4541. 3. Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete, as tested in accordance with.ASTM C 309. 4. Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials, minimum retention of 0.36 kg/m2, as tested in accordance with ASTM C 156. 5. Insensitivity to alkaline environment up to pH 14, as tested in accordance with ASTM D Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WATER VAPOR CONTROL AND FLOOR SEALER 09615 -1 1308. 6. Certify acceptance and exposure to continuous topical water exposure after final cure. 7. Certify acceptance to continuous exposure to topical foot traffic. D. Submit list of product use and performance history, for the same formulation and system design, listing reference sources. Similar projects shall have documented minimum initial water vapor transmission rates of 15 Ibs per 1,000 sf. per 24 hrs, and have resulted in maintained water vapor reduction rate of less than 3 Ibs per 1,000 sf. per 24 hrs when tested to ASTM F 1869-98. E. Submit anhydrous calcium chloride testing according to ASTM F 1869-98, that shall be performed by the Owner's Special Inspector to the Architect, Owner, General Contractor, and Water Vapor Reduction System Manufacture's Representative. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Application Company to be currently approved by the product manufacturer, experienced in surface preparation and application of the material and subject to inspection and control of the manufacturer. B. Application Company shall have no less than five (5) years experience installing the Vapor Reduction Systems and employ an approved applicator with equivalent experience. C. Manufacturer shall have no less than ten (10) years experience in manufacturing the same water vapor reduction system. The water vapor reduction system must be specifically formulated and marketed internationally for water vapor reduction and alkalinity control without change of formulation or system design for a minimum period of five (5) years. No exceptions. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to the job site in their original unopened containers, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name and brand designation. B. Store products in an approved ventilated dry area; protect from dampness, freezing, and direct sun light. Product should not be stored in areas with temperatures in excess of 90 ° F or below 50 • F. C. Handle product in a manner that will prevent breakage of containers and damage products. D. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer shall provide the Owner with their standard ten (10) year warranty at no additional cost. Application Company of water vapor reduction system shall provide standard installation warranty for workmanship. 1.09 SCHEDULING A. Before installation of the receiving finish flooring material systems or access floor pedestals over the interior concrete slabs, anhydrous calcium chloride testing shall be performed as per ASTM F 1869-98 by the Owner's Special Inspector as outlined in Article 3.1 below to determine Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WATER VAPOR CONTROL AND FLOOR SEALER the level of water vapor transmission in the slab and the type of moisture vapor reduction system required. B. The Owner's Special Inspector will coordinate with the Owner scheduling water vapor reduction system testing and allowing enough time to test, submit and install the water vapor reduction system before installation of floor finish. C. The Owner's Special Inspector will allow for as much time as is reasonable for the concrete slab to dry before installing anhydrous calcium chloride tests. All mastics, glues, and / or contaminants shall be removed to provide a clean, sound, concrete substrate prior to installing anhydrous calcium chloride tests as per ASTM F 1869-98. No Exceptions! PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Koester American Corporation; Corporate Headquarters, 757-425-1206, www.koesterusa.com. 1. Local representative: Specified Polymers, (619)294-8010. B. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Water-based primer/curing agent, 100% solids VAP 1 2000 System containing specifically formulated chemicals and resins to provide the following characteristics and properties. 1. One (1) coat system applied to a properly prepared concrete surface. 2. The water vapor reduction system shall be required to reduce vapor emissions by a minimum of 95% after final cure. 3. Verify water vapor reduction by anhydrous calcium chloride testing according to ASTM F 1869-98 prior to proceeding with any floor covering installation B. Primer: VAP 1 Primer or approved equal and compatible with water vapor reducer system. 2.03 MIX DESIGNS A. Use clean containers and mix thoroughly as per Manufacturer's requirements to obtain a homogeneous mixture. Use a low speed motor less than 400 rpm and a two bladed Jiffy mixing blade only. DO NOT AERATE. B. VAP 1 2000 Mix Ratio: Mix Component A and B at a ratio of 2.4 :1 2.04 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. C. Calcium chloride test requirements: 1. Anhydrous calcium chloride testing shall be performed by the Owner's Special Inspector as outlined in Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1 - Materials and Workmanship. 2. Provide anhydrous calcium chloride tests according ASTM F 1869 - 98 in accordance to all surface preparation methods outlined. Tests shall be installed onto freshly abraded contaminant free concrete. No exceptions 3. Only conduct calcium chloride tests at the same temperature and humidity expected during normal use. If this is not possible, then the test conditions should be 75° F +-10° F and Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WATER VAPOR CONTROL AND FLOOR SEALER 50+-10% relative humidity. Maintain these conditions 48 hours prior to and during tests. Water vapor transmission levels are directly affected by ambient room temperature and readings conducted without a sustained ambient temperature are NOT acceptable. 4. Special Inspector shall provide test results with a marked up floor finish plan showing test results. Special Inspector shall provide a written clarification on status of the ambient air temperature and humidity before and during the testing procedures. 5. Special Inspector shall provide a marked up floor plan showing areas with vapor reduction system recommendations. D. Initial calcium chloride tests: 1. Before installation of finish flooring system over interior concrete slabs, the Special Inspector shall make known the level of water vapor transmission in the slab in accordance to ASTM F 1869 to all parties involved. The Special Inspector will document the test results and provide recommendations on the type of moisture vapor reduction system to be utilized. E. Floor treatment calcium chloride tests: 1. After proper cure of the final coat of the water vapor reduction system the Special Inspector shall provide calcium chloride tests to determine if the level of water vapor transmission and alkalinity are reduced to the Owner's specified levels in conjunction with the flooring manufacturers installation requirements. Contact Owner and water vapor reduction system Manufacturer's Representative concerning areas with a water vapor transmission level greater than the Owner's specified levels. F. Adhesion tests: 1. The Special Inspector shall verify proper adhesion of flooring adhesives, coatings, and leveling compounds to the final vapor reduction coating system for acceptability. Contact Manufacturer's Representatives for recommendations. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Inspect all surfaces with regard to their suitability to receive moisture vapor reduction system with vapor reduction coating system by Manufacturer's Representative. Cost for this service shall be the responsibility of the Application Company. B. Clean all surfaces to receive moisture vapor reduction system. No exceptions to the below information will be permitted. 1. Shotblast all floors and clean surfaces with Shop Vac to remove all residue off the substrate. 2. Remove ALL defective materials, and foreign matter such as dust, adhesives, leveling compounds, screeds, paint, dirt, floor hardeners, bond breakers, oil, grease, curing agents, form release agents, efflorescence, laitance, shotblast beebees, abandoned anchors, etc. 3. Repair all cracks, expansion joints, control joints, and open surface honeycombs and fill in accordance with Manufacturers recommendations. No Exceptions. 4. Inform vapor reduction system Manufacturer if concrete additives like chlorides or any other soluble compounds that can contaminate surfaces have been used in the concrete mix design. 5. Reinforcing fibers must be burned off, scraped and vacuumed. Remove, after shotblasting, leaving no fibers left on the concrete surface. 6. The applicating contractor is responsible for providing uncontaminated, absorptive, sound concrete surface at all times. 7. Do not acid etch. C. Repair concrete prior to moisture vapor reduction system installation with approved concrete repair materials. Comply with all requirements as listed in the Manufacturers technical data information. Consult with vapor reduction system manufacturer. No exceptions. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WATER VAPOR CONTROL AND FLOOR SEALER 09615 -4 D. Make sure surfaces to be treated that have NOT been previously treated with penetrating sealers etc. of any kind. If this is the case, consult with Manufacturers Representative prior to any application of the moisture vapor reduction system. E. Only a surface substrate that REMAINS uncontaminated, absorptive, and sound is fit to receive a water vapor reduction system. Comply with all requirements as listed in Manufacturer's technical data information. No exceptions. F. Proper removal of contaminants can render surfaces too rough for certain flooring systems. Therefore shotblast a small test area and verify with the flooring applicator that the surfaces are fit to receive the specified flooring system without the application of an underlayment on top of the water vapor reduction system. G. Do not fill holes or depressions or apply leveling course until AFTER installation of sealer. 3.03 APPLICATION A. VAP 1 2000 System Application: 1. The coverage rates for this single coat system depend on the surface texture and porosity of the substrate as well as the measured level of moisture from Section 3.1 Examination. On average, coverage of 70 to 130 sq. ft./gal. Can be expected. 2. Approximate coverage's relative to existing levels of moisture vapor as follows. a. Up to 8lbs./1,000sq.ft./24hr.130sq.ft./gal. b. Up to 15 lbs./1000 sq. ft./24hr. 90 sq.ft./gal. c. Upto25lbs./1000sq.ft./24hr. 70 sq.ft./gal. 3. Apply one (1) coat of VAP 1 2000 at the average coverage rate listed above using a squeegee and a 3/8-inch nap roller leaving no areas untreated. Allow to cure a minimum of 12 hours before installing flooring system. Consult Koester VAP 1 2000 System technical data sheets for additional application instructions. B. VAP 1 Primer System Application: (For very porous surfaces to avoid out gassing / air displacement, see technical brochures for installation requirements and contact Manufacturers Representative. No Exceptions. 1. Dampen uncontaminated concrete surface, (SSD) Surface Saturated Dry, leaving NO standing water. Surfaces must be damp, not wet to the touch. Always use clean potable water to pre-dampen concrete surfaces. Only pre-dampen concrete prior to the first VAP Primer coat. Do NOT pre-dampen between subsequent coats of the VAP Systems. Verify ambient temperature and relative humidity with Manufacturers Representative for accelerated cure schedules. 2. Spray VAP 1 Primer leaving no areas untreated. Back brush thoroughly. 3. Avoid puddling and pinholes when back brushing. Provide continuous ventilation and air movement during curing process. No exceptions. 4. Apply VAP Primer at a rate of approximately 200 sq. ft. /gal minimum and allow to cure a minimum of 6 hours. Consult Koester technical data sheets for additional instructions. C. Cementitious underlayment system and primer manufactured by Koester American or approved equal if required by the Owner, Floor Covering Installer, or the Floor Covering Manufacturer may be used to level and smooth surfaces after shotblasting the floor on top of the water vapor reduction system. The Underlayment system and primer utilized must be approved by the water vapor reduction system manufacturer (no exceptions). When water based adhesives are utilized in the floor covering installation, use the approved underlayment system with primer prior to the installation of the flooring system. Please consult adhesive manufacturer for their minimum (approximately 1/8") recommended thickness of cementitious underlayment to absorb excess moisture in the adhesive. Leveling of the substrate shall not be considered part of the water vapor reduction system unless manufactured by the water vapor reduction system manufacturer. No exceptions. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WATER VAPOR CONTROL AND FLOOR SEALER 09615 -5 D. For installation of resilient flooring directly over the water vapor reduction system, the contractor responsible for installing the floor covering system shall use a 100% solids adhesives, contact type adhesives with long working times, and / or the vapor reduction system manufacturers adhesive that can be applied to substrates with a pH up to 10. The method of use is to apply the contact type adhesives to the substrate and allow the materials water to flash off prior to the flooring installation. Always test proper adhesion of adhesive to water vapor reduction system prior to installation of entire flooring systems. No exceptions. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean all tools and equipment immediately with xylene when using the VAP 1 2000 System for water vapor reduction. B. Remove debris resulting from water vapor reduction system installation from project site. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect each coat during specified cure period from any kind of traffic, topical water, and contaminants. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center WATER VAPOR CONTROL AND FLOOR SEALER 09615 -6 SECTION 09300 TILE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate. D. Coated glass mat backer board as tile substrate. E. Ceramic trim. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of tile backer board. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A108 Series/A 118 Series/A 136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 1999. 1. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 1999. 2. ANSI A108.1 b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999. 3. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999. 4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 1999. 5. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999. 6. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999. 7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout; 1999. 8. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999. 9. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999. 10. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units; 1999. 11. ANSI A118.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar; 1999. 12. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 1999. 13. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999. 14. ANSI A118.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center TILE 09300 -1 15. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999. 16. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 1988. B. ASTM C 1178/C 1178M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel; 2004. C. TCA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of North America, Inc.; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details. D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18x18 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of TCA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A 118 Series on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 5 percent of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. 1. Dai-Tile: www.daltile.com. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4.1-6 Trade Names or Equals. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center TILE 09300 -2 B. Ceramic Tile Type Daltile: Natural Hues: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. 2. Size and Shape: 12x 12 inch -floorapplicaton, 3x6 inch -wall application. 3. Edges: Square. 4. Surface Finish: Matte glazed with coefficient of friction equal to or exceeding 0.6 when wet. 5. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's standard range. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. W.R. Bonsai Co: www.bonsal.com. 2. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 3. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 4. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. B. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: 1. Dry-Set Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.1. 2. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4. 3. Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, thinset bond type. 2.03 GROUT MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. W.R. Bonsai Co: www.bonsal.com. 2. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 3. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 4. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. B. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.8, modified epoxy emulsion grout, 100% solids epoxy grout, color as selected; use for bathroom and janitor's closets applications. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Cleavage Membrane: 4 mil thick polyethylene film. B. Membrane at Walls: 4 mil thick polyethylene film. C. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. D. Coated Glass Mat Backer Board: ASTM C 1178/C1178M, with coated inorganic fiberglass mat on both surfaces and integral acrylic coating vapor retarder. E. Mesh Tape: 2-inch wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits: 1. Moisture emission rate: Not greater than 3 Ib per 1000 sq ft per 24 hours when tested Carlsbad City Library Learning Center TILE 09300 -3 using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours. 2. Alkalinity: pH range of 5-9. E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Wall application: Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and comers, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge. E. Wall application: Install tile backer board in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using galvanized roofing nails or corrosion-resistant bugle head drywall screws. Bed fiberglass self-adhesive tape at all joints and comers with material used to set tiles. 3.03 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. Install tile and thresholds and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor and wall joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install thresholds where indicated. G. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. H. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. I. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. J. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. K. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113, dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F122, with latex-portland cement grout. 2. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F131. B. Over wood substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F142, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F143. C. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center TILE 09300 -4 3.05 INSTALLATION-WALL TILE A. On exterior walls install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W244, thin-set over cementitious backer units, with waterproofing membrane. B. Over water resistant 'Greenboard' gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W243, thin-set with dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated other than at showers and bathtub walls, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W222, one coat method. C. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center TILE 09300 -5 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient tile flooring. 6. Resilient base. C. Installation accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM F 710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2005. B. ASTM F 1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; 2004. C. ASTM F 1344 - Standard Specification for Rubber Floor Tile; 2004. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc.'s initial selection. C. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 16x16 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS-TILE FLOORING A. Rubber Tile: Homogeneous color and pattern throughout thickness, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 1344, of Class corresponding to type specified. 2. Design: Smooth. 3. Size: 12x12 inch. 4. Overall Thickness: 0.125 inch. 5. Pattern: Solid color. 6. Manufacturers: a. Freudenberg Building Systems; Product Noraplan Astro - www.norarubber.com. b. Freudenberg Building Systems; Product Noraplan Logic - www.norarubber.com. c. Substitutions: See Supplemental Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -1 B. Rubber Tile: Recycled Rubber Flooring: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F 1344, of Class corresponding to type specified. Flooring shall be made of minimum 5% SBR and maximum 95% EPDM rubber with a non-yellowing urethane binder. Material shall be colored thoughout the tile with fade resistant pigments. Material shall be rated for flammability as class 1 (ASTM E 648) if 70% or greater EPDM material is specified. Material shall be rated for flammability as class II for materials specified with less than 70% EPDM. 2. Design: recycled rubber flooring. 3. Size: 24x24 inch. 4. Overall Thickness: 0.15 inch. 5. Pattern: recycled rubber, mixed colors, as chosen by Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. 6. Manufacturers: a. Expanko, Inc.; Product Reztec rubber flooring. b. Substitutions: See Supplemental Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 MATERIALS-BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style A, Straight, and as follows: 1. Height: 4 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. 3. Finish: Matte. 4. Length: Roll. 5. Color Color as selected from manufacturer's standards. 6. Manufacturers: a. BurkeMercer Flooring Products: www.burkemercer.com. b. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com. c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com. d. Substitutions: See Supplemental Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Moldings and Edge Strips: Metal. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat and are ready to receive resilient flooring. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other Carlsbad City Library Learning Center RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 -2 defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. B. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. D. Conduct calcium chloride moisture tests according to manufacturer's recommendations. E. Sub-floor moisture emissions level shall be less than 3 lbs./1 OOOft/24 hours for glue down applications. 3.03 INSTALLATION-TILE FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. F. Where floor finishes are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. Secure metal strips before installation of flooring with stainless steel screws. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. I. Install tiles using only those adhesives, sealers and floor preparation materials recommended by the manufacturer. J. Recycled Rubber Tile; Tile shall be rolled with a 3 section, 100 Ib. roller 3 times after installation. 3.04 INSTALLATION-BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal comers. At external corners, V cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its thickness and fold. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.05 CLEANING A. Recycled Rubber Tile: After installation, the floor will require a minimum of 24 hours to set. Do not finish or clean floor during this period. After 24 hours, the floor shall be maintained according to manufacturer's post-installation maintenance instructions. Where required, floor is to be sealed with the manufacturer's recommended floor sealer. Only light foot traffic is permitted on floor for 24 hours after installation. Do not use rolling carts, ladders or any other object on the floor that can cause damage. B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. C. Clean, seal, and wax resilient flooring products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Protect floor against scratching and gouging with material (reinforced paper, Masonite, etc...) suited to the type of traffic it will be submitted to during the completion of construction. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center RESILIENT FLOORING E. After completion of construction, the floor shall be cleaned according to the manufacturer's post-installation maintenance instructions. F. Provide manufacturer's detailed post-installation maintenance instructions to those responsible for post-installation maintenance. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09685 CARPET TILE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, fully adhered. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM D 2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials; 2004. B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. C. ASTM E 648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2004. D. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2002. E. CRI (GLA) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Adhesive Products; www.carpet-rug.org; current edition. F. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2000. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. C. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. D. Submit two, 6 inch long samples of edge strip. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years documented experience. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals, for additional provisions. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CARPET TILE B. Provide an additional 10% of carpet tiles of each color and pattern selected. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Constantine Commercial; Product Precision Loc Modular Tile - Full scale, C204Q42. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Carpet Tile Type Precision Loc Modular Tile: Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot. 1. Tile Size: 36x36 inch, nominal. 2. Thickness: 0.15 inch. 3. Color: as selected by Manuel Oncina Architects, Inc. 4. Pattern: Precision Loc - Full Scale pattern. 5. Flammability: Passes Class 1 (ASTM E 648). Smoke Density (ASTM E 662) < 450. 6. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.45 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with ASTME648orNFPA253. 7. Primary Backing Material: 5.5 oz. Woven Nylon/Poly composite. 8. Secondary Backing Material: 100% closed cell vinyl composite backing with fiberglass interlinerfor dimensional stability. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Edge Strips: Embossed aluminum, color as selected. C. Adhesives: Acceptable to carpet manufacturers, compatible with materials being adhered; CRI Green Label certified; in lieu of labeled product, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable. D. Contact Adhesive: Recommended by carpet manufacturer, releasable type. E. Post Installation Protection: Constantine Commercial Carpet Guard #71160R, 23mm thickness. DO NOT USE PLASTIC! Plastic can permanently discolor carpet and cause accelerated soiling. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for carpet tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by carpet tile manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. etiari r.Hv I ihrarv Learnina Center CARPET TILE C. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CR1104. B. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. C. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. D. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. E. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. F. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate. G. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. H. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center CARPET TILE SECTION 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings. C. See Schedule - Surfaces to be Finished, at end of Section. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items. B. Section 05510-MetalStairs: Shop-primed items. C. Section 05520 - Handrails and Railings: Shop-primed handrails. D. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. 1.03 REFERENCES A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. B. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications- 2003. C. ASTM D 4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials; 1992 (Reapproved 2003). D. NACE (IMP) - Industrial Maintenance Painting; NACE International; Edition date unknown. E. SSPC (PM1) - Good Painting Practice: SSPC Painting Manual, Vol. 1; Society for Protective Coatings; Fourth Edition. F. SSPC (PM2) - Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 2, Systems and Specifications; Society for Protective Coatings; 1995, Seventh Edition. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products and special coatings, including VOC content. C. Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 8x10 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and substrate conditions requiring special attention. F. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PAINTS AND COATINGS 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years experience. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes. B. All products must not exceed maximum allowable VOC's as set by the State of California. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.10 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty: Include five year material coverage for concrete sealer. D. Warranty: Include coverage for bond to substrate. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals, for additional provisions. B. Supply 1 gallon of each colon store where directed. C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Paints: Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900 -2 1. Base Manufacturer: Dunn-Edwards. B. Water Repellent Coating: 1. Base Manufacturer: Degussa Corp, Aerosil & Silanes Division, www.chemtrete.com, 1 -800- 828-0919. a. Local representative: Specified Polymers / J3, 619-294-8010. C. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments: 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D-National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS-EXTERIOR A. Paint GE-TR-WR - Plaster/Stucco, Transparent, Water Repellent, 1 coat. 1. One coat; CHEM-TRETE BSM 400 B. Paint ME-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat 1. One coat primer; Corrobar 43-5 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Permasheen W901. C. Paint ME-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Permasheen W901. D. Paint MgE-OP-3L - Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat primer Galv-Alum QD43-7. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Permasheen W901. E. Paint E-Pav - Pavement Marking Paint: 1. Red (per Fire Marshal Requirements): One coat,; Vin-L-Stripe. 2. White: One coat,; Vin-L-Stripe. 3. Green: One coat,; Vin-L-Stripe. 2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Paint WI-TR-V - Wood, Transparent, Varnish, No Stain: 1. Satin: Two coats of varnish; Permashield 100. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900 -3 B. Paint WI-TR-VS - Wood, Transparent, Varnish, Stain: 1. One coat of stain; Decolac II. 2. Satin: Two coats of varnish; Permasheild 100. C. Paint MI-OP-3L - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat primer; Corrobar 43-5. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Permasheen W901. D. Paint MI-OP-2L - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Latex, 2 Coat: 1. Touch-up with Corrobar 43-5 primer. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Permasheen W901. E. Paint Mgl-OP-3L - Galvanized Metals, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat Galv-Alum QD43-7. 2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of latex enamel; Permasheen W901. F. Paint GI-OP-3L - Gypsum Board/Plaster, Latex, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of Walltone W420 primer sealer. 2. Eggshell: Two coats of latex enamel; Permashell W940, for walls. 3. Flat: Two coats of latex enamel; Decovel W401, for ceilings. G. Paint I-TR-F - Fire-Retardant Coating, Alkyd, 3 Coat: 1. One coat of Super U 365 (E-22-1) fire retardant primer sealer. 2. Semi-Gloss: Two coats of fire retardant alkyd enamel, Aristoglo 74, flame/smoke rating of 25/10. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PARTS EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Before applying any water repellent, or coating, a surface inspection with a manufacturer's representative is required to ensure the proper coating is applied. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums, or as recommended by the product manufacturer, whichever is more stringent: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900 -4 repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. C. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Check the compatibility of all caulking and patching material to be used with the paints and coatings. F. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. G. Plaster Surfaces to be Painted: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. H. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based sealer or primer. I. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. J. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. K. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. L. Interior Wood Items to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner. M. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D. Protect water repellent treated areas from rain and other surface water for a period of not less than four hours after application. E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. F. Sand wood surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. H. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900 -5 3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. B. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.06 SCHEDULE • SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. 3. Stainless steel items. B. Paint the surfaces described in PART 2, Paint Systems Articles. C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished. 1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas. 3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. D. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. 3.07 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS A. Exterior plaster/ Stucco: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior Planter Walls: GE-TR-WR. B. Gypsum Board: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Interior GI-OP-3L. C. Wood: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Interior WI-TR-V. D. Wood Doors: WI-TR-VS. E. Wood and Steel: All column/post surfaces. 1. Interior: I-TR-F. F. Steel Doors and Frames: Finish all surfaces. 1. Exterior: MgE-OP-3L 2. Interior: Mgl-OP-3L G. Steel Fabrications: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior: ME-OP-3L; finish all surfaces, including concealed surfaces, before installation. 2. Interior: MI-OP-3L. H. Galvanized Steel: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior: MgE-OP-3L. 2. Interior: Mgl-OP-3L. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900 -6 I. Shop-Primed Metal Items: Finish all surfaces exposed to view. 1. Exterior ME-OP-2L. 2. Interior: MI-OP-2L. J. Exterior Pavement Markings: E-Pav. 1. To comply with Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC), 2000 edition END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900 -7 SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Market-boards and Tackboards. B. Smartboard. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies B. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004. B. ASTM C 36/C 36M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard; 2001. C. ASTM D 1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes; 2002. D. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005. E. FS L-P-1040 - Plastic Sheets and Strips (Polyvinyl Fluoride); Federal Specifications and Standards; Revision B, 1977. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 2-5.3.3 - Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on markerboard, tackboard, trim, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations. D. Samples: Submit two samples 6 by 6 inch in size illustrating materials and finish, color and texture of tackboard, tackboard surfacing, and trim. E. Test Reports: Show conformance to specified surface burning characteristics requirements. F. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions. G. Maintenance Data: Include data on regular cleaning, stain removal. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Supplemental Provisions Section 6-8 - Completion and Acceptance, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year warranty for markerboard to include warranty against discoloration due to cleaning, crazing or cracking, and staining. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Carlsbad City Library Learning Center VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS A. Visual Display Boards: 1. MDC; Product MEMERASE MWW6001/4426. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. B. Smartboard: 1. Polyvision Corporation (Nelson Adams); Product Walk and Talk Interactive Whiteboard: www.polyvision.com. 2. Substitutions: See Supplemental Provisions, Section 4-1.6 - Trade Names or Equals. 2.02 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS A. Markerboards: Flexible dry eraseable writing surface. 1. Color: White. 2. Backing: Polyester Drill 3. Tensile Strength: 160x160 4. Tear Strength: 82x89 5. Vinyl to Fabric Adhesion: 3.0 pounds. 6. Fire Resistance: Class A. 7. Cadmium and Mercury free. 8. Does not contain, nor can degrade to, Perfluoro Octanoic Acid (PFOA). 9. Stain Resistance: 24 hour exposure followed by washing with soap and water. The following staining agents will result in NO STAIN on the material. a. Crayon b. Vinegar c. Detergent d. Lemon Juice e. Coffee f. Tea g. Pencil h. Mayonnaise i. Bleach j. Milk k. Ketchup I. Cola m. Ethanol n. 10% Sodium Hydroxide o. Oleic Acid p. Port Wine q. 10% Ammonia r. Hydrogen Peroxide 10. Height: 60 inches. 11. Length: As indicated in Schedule below. 12. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with concealed fasteners. 13. Frame Profile: Manufacturer's standard 14. Frame Finish: Anodized, clear. 15. Accessories: Provide chalk tray and upper cork tackboard rail. 16. Accessories: a. ChalkTray Rail: Mem Erase - ME2002/4426, or equal; Color: Clear aluminum. b. Cork Tackboard Rail: Mem Erase - ME3003/4426, or equal; Color: Clear aluminum. B. Tackboards: Fine-grained, homogeneous natural cork. 1. Cork Thickness: 7/32 inch. 2. Backing: Hardboard, 1/4 inch thick, laminated to tack surface. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Carlsbad City Library Learning Center VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 4. Height: 24 inches. 5. Length: varies in inches as indicated on Interior Elevations. 6. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with concealed fasteners. 7. Frame Profile: Manufacturer's standard 8. Frame Finish: Anodized, clear. C. Smartboard: Touch-sensitive, Teflon-coated, dry erase, low glare, projection-optimized surface. 1. Color: White. 2. Dimensions: 52.6 inch x 97.8 inch x 4.3 inch 3. Weight: 104 Ibs. 4. Resolution: 8000x8000 5. Power Requirements: 120V/240V, 50-60Hz, 5W, wall-mounted power supply. 6. Certification: FCC class A, CE 2.03 MATERIALS A. Hardboard for Cores: AHA A135.4, Class 1 - Tempered, S2S (smooth two sides). B. Adhesives: Type used by manufacturer. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Temporary Protective Cover Sheet polyethylene, 8 mil thick. B. Cleaning Instruction Plate: Provide instructions for dry erase board cleaning on a metal plate fastened to perimeter frame near chalkrail C. Chalkrail: Aluminum, manufacturer's standard extruded profile one piece full length of dry erase board, molded ends; concealed fasteners, clear aluminum anodized finish. D. Mounting Brackets: Concealed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. C. Verify flat wall surface for frameless adhesive-applied boards. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install with top of chalk tray at 36 inches above finished floor. C. Secure units level and plumb. D. Butt Joints: Install with tight hairline joints. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cover with protective cover, taped to frame. C. Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. Rooms 107-110: One 48 x 96 markerboard with chalkrail and tackrail. Location: Centered on Carlsbad City Library Learning Center VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 -3 South wall. 24" high tackboard in locations as indicated on Interior Elevations. B. Room 119: 24" high tackboard in locations as indicated on Interior Elevations. C. Room 122: 24" high tackboard in locations as indicated on Interior Elevations. D. Room 202: Smartboard, as specified, on West wall as indicated on Interior Elevations. 24" high tackboard in locations as indicated on Interior Elevations. E. Room 205: One 48 x 144 markerboard with chalkrail and tackrail. Location: Centered on North wall. 24" tackboard in locations as indicated on Interior Elevations. F. Room 206: One 48 x 120 markerboard with chalkrail and tackrail. Location: Centered on West wall. 24" tackboard in locations as indicated on Interior Elevations. G. Room 208: One 48 x 120 markerboard with chalkrail and tackrail. Location: Centered on East wall. 24" tackboard in locations as indicated on Interior Elevations. H. Room 212: 24" high tackboard in locations as indicated on Interior Elevations. I. Room 215: One 48 x 144 markerboard with chalkrail and tackrail. Location: As indicated on drawings. J. Rooms 216-219 and 222-226: 24" high tackboard in locations as indicated on Interior Elevations. K. Room 228: 24" high tackboard in locations as indicated on Interior Elevations. END OF SECTION Carlsbad City Library Learning Center VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS